WO2021004234A1 - Data transmission method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Data transmission method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021004234A1
WO2021004234A1 PCT/CN2020/096163 CN2020096163W WO2021004234A1 WO 2021004234 A1 WO2021004234 A1 WO 2021004234A1 CN 2020096163 W CN2020096163 W CN 2020096163W WO 2021004234 A1 WO2021004234 A1 WO 2021004234A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
side device
logical channel
terminal
data transmission
logical
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/096163
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
范强
娄崇
黄曲芳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021004234A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021004234A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/08Load balancing or load distribution
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/0205Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control at the air interface
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/0231Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control based on communication conditions
    • H04W28/0236Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control based on communication conditions radio quality, e.g. interference, losses or delay
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a data transmission method and communication device.
  • the radio link control (RLC) entity performs transmission.
  • the at least two identical data packets are transmitted to the media access control (media access control, MAC) layer through a logical channel (logical channel, LCH) corresponding to each RLC entity one-to-one.
  • the at least two identical data packets transmitted to the MAC layer may be encapsulated in different MAC protocol data units (protocol data unit, PDU), and then transmitted on the cell corresponding to each LCH.
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • a base station can configure more than 2 LCHs for duplication transmission for a radio bearer.
  • there may be a waste of resources For example, when the base station configures 4 LCHs for a certain radio bearer of a terminal device for duplication transmission, the terminal device copies the same PDCP data packet of this radio bearer into 4 identical data packets, and then transmits them on the air interface through these 4 LCHs. To the base station.
  • the data transmission quality of these 4 LCHs is good, you may only need to use 2 LCHs for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission reliability of the data packet, but in fact, 4 LCHs are used for repeated transmission. , Thus, caused a waste of resources.
  • the present application provides a data transmission method and communication device, which are used to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization when multiple logical channels are configured for a radio bearer.
  • a data transmission method is provided.
  • the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with the function of repeated transmission on at least two logical channels.
  • the terminal-side device Before the terminal-side device performs data transmission, the terminal-side device first obtains The uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel in at least two logical channels, and then the logical channel used for data transmission is determined according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. If the number of logical channels used for data transmission is greater than one In this case, the terminal-side device performs the repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission.
  • the logical channel used for data transmission is determined by the terminal-side device according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
  • the terminal The side device can select only a part of the logical channels for repeated transmission, so that a data packet on the air interface side is only repeated a few times, thereby avoiding resource waste.
  • the terminal-side device can use all the logical channels for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission quality, thereby achieving a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization.
  • the network side device compared to the way that the network side device senses the channel quality change and then controls whether the logical channel is used for data transmission, the network side device generates instruction information, instructs data transmission and retransmission, and the terminal side processes the instruction information. For a certain period of time, the determination of the logical channel for data transmission by the terminal-side device can save the time required for the foregoing process, and therefore, it can respond to changes in channel conditions more quickly.
  • each logical channel is associated with a different cell group.
  • a first logical channel For any one of the at least two logical channels, it can be called a first logical channel.
  • the uplink data of the first logical channel The transmission quality is the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
  • the channel quality of each logical channel can be indicated by the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to each logical channel.
  • the quality of data transmission is simple and effective.
  • the terminal-side device can use different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels, so that the terminal-side device can select the reference for measurement according to the actual situation. Signal, increase the flexibility of the program.
  • the terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels, for example, the types of reference signals can be divided into the first type and the second type, then the terminal The side device can use one of the types of reference signals (such as the second type of reference signal) as a reference, so when the terminal side device uses a reference signal other than the reference signal (such as the first type of reference signal) for measurement , The terminal-side device determines that the channel quality of the cell measured using the first-type reference signal is the sum of the measurement result obtained by the terminal-side device in the cell and the preset offset, and the first-type reference signal is One of the different types of reference signals.
  • the types of reference signals such as the second type of reference signal
  • the terminal-side device may also receive a first indication sent by the network-side device for indicating at least one transmission quality threshold, where the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine that it is used for data transmission Logical channel.
  • the terminal-side device receives the first instruction, the terminal-side device can determine that the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission, that is, the first instruction implicitly instructs the terminal-side device to determine the logical channel used for data transmission channel.
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold may include but is not limited to the following four situations:
  • the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold includes N first transmission quality thresholds and M*N second transmission quality thresholds
  • the N first transmission quality thresholds are associated with the primary logical channel
  • the M*N second transmission quality thresholds are associated with the at least one secondary logical channel
  • M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second case the number of the at least two logical channels is K, the at least one transmission quality threshold is divided into K groups, and each group of transmission quality thresholds includes at least one transmission quality threshold, and the K logical channels and the K groups
  • the transmission quality threshold has a one-to-one correspondence, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the difference between the first case and the second case is whether a primary logical channel is set in at least two logical channels, and correspondingly, whether a set of transmission quality thresholds for the primary logical channel is set in the at least one transmission quality threshold.
  • the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is associated with the primary logical channel.
  • at least one quality transmission threshold is set only for the main logical channel.
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to each of the at least two logical channels. That is, regardless of whether the main logical channel is set in at least two logical channels, at least one transmission quality threshold is set for each logical channel.
  • the terminal-side device may send to the network-side device a second indication for indicating whether each of the at least two logical channels is used for data transmission, and the second indication includes the radio bearer And the bit sequence used to indicate the logical channel used for data transmission in the at least two logical channels.
  • the determination result can be notified to the network-side device, and the network-side device can learn which logical channel or channels the terminal-side device performs data transmission on.
  • the terminal-side device first receives a third instruction sent by the network-side device, and the third instruction is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at least the first part of the at least two logical channels for repetition Then, the terminal side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each of the at least two logical channels, and determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel
  • the at least two logical channels include the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel, so that the terminal side device uses the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel for data transmission for repeated transmission.
  • the network side device can indicate a part of the logical channel used for data transmission to the terminal side device through the third instruction, and the terminal side device can determine whether another part of the logical channel is useful according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. In this way, when the quality of the logical channel for data transmission indicated by the network side device is poor, the terminal side device can increase the logical channel for data transmission, which can improve the data transmission quality.
  • the terminal-side device first receives a fourth instruction sent by the network-side device, and the fourth instruction is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use the first part of the at least two logical channels for repetition.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each of the at least two logical channels, and determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, Therefore, when the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first part of logical channels is greater than 1, the terminal side device performs repeated transmission on the logical channels used for data transmission in the first part of logical channels.
  • the network side device can indicate a part of the logical channels used for data transmission to the terminal side device through the third instruction, and the terminal side device can only determine the data indicated by the network side device according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. Whether there are logical channels for data transmission in some logical channels. For example, when the quality of the logical channels for data transmission indicated by the network side device is good, the terminal side device can determine that only some of the logical channels are used for data Transmission can reduce waste of resources.
  • a data transmission method is provided.
  • the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with the function of repeating transmission on at least two logical channels.
  • the terminal-side device Before the terminal-side device performs data transmission, the terminal-side device The channel quality of each of the at least two cells, the first mapping relationship between the at least two logical channels and the at least two cells is determined, so that each of the at least two logical channels passes through the first mapping The cells mapped in the relationship perform data transmission, and then send a first indication for indicating the first mapping relationship to the network side device.
  • the network side device pre-configures the mapping relationship between logical channels and cells, it can avoid that the channel quality of the cell associated with a certain logical channel is always preferred, while the channel quality of the cell associated with other logical channels is always deviated, thus Causes the problem of low reliability of data transmission.
  • the first mapping relationship includes: arranging the at least two cells in ascending or descending order of channel quality, and combining the at least two cells after the arrangement with the at least two logical channels according to a preset rule Mapping.
  • the preset rule is that the cells corresponding to each logical channel include the first type cell and/or the second type cell, the first type cell is a cell located in the first half of the at least two cells after the arrangement, and the second type cell
  • the second-class cells are cells located in the second half of the at least two cells after the arrangement.
  • a communication device in a third aspect, includes a processor for implementing the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor can call and execute the program instructions stored in the memory to implement any method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device may also include a transceiver, and the transceiver is used for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the other device is a network side device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a communication unit configured to obtain the uplink data transmission quality of each of at least two logical channels, and the radio bearer of the communication device is configured to The function of repeated transmission on at least two logical channels; a processing unit for determining a logical channel for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, and, on the logical channel for data transmission When the number is greater than 1, the processing unit uses the logical channel for data transmission to perform the repeated transmission through the communication unit.
  • the communication device provided in the fourth aspect can be used to execute the method corresponding to the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device provided in the fourth aspect can be used to execute the method corresponding to the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory, configured to implement the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of a wireless communication system applicable to an embodiment of this application
  • Figure 2A shows the network architecture involved in implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in the CA scenario
  • Figure 2B shows the network architecture involved in implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in the DC scenario
  • Figure 3A is a schematic diagram of a network architecture in which a network side device configures three legs for a radio bearer
  • 3B is a schematic diagram of a network architecture in which a network side device configures three legs for a radio bearer
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of an example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a network side device configuring an associated cell group for a logical channel in an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a second indication in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a terminal side device determining a logical channel for data transmission from at least two logical channels indicated by the network side device according to an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a terminal side device determining a logical channel for data transmission among channels other than at least two logical channels indicated by the network side device in an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 12A is a schematic diagram of sorted cells obtained by arranging cells corresponding to logical channels in descending order of RSRP in an embodiment of the application;
  • 12B is a schematic diagram of sorted cells obtained by arranging cells corresponding to logical channels in ascending order of RSRP in an embodiment of the application;
  • 13A to 13B are schematic diagrams of protocol stacks for duplication between different terminal side devices
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 15 is a structural block diagram of an example of a communication device provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • 16 is a structural block diagram of another example of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 17 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 18 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 19 is another schematic block diagram of the communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • Terminal equipment also known as terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • An independent device with voice and/or data connectivity for example, may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem. It may also be a chip system with the functions of the above-mentioned device, and the specific form of the terminal-side device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal-side device may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • the terminal may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal, mobile terminal, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • UE user equipment
  • mobile terminal mobile terminal
  • subscriber unit subscriber station
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point access point
  • AP remote terminal
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal access terminal
  • user terminal user terminal
  • user agent user agent
  • user device user device
  • it may include mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers with mobile terminals, portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built or vehicle-mounted mobile devices, and smart wearable devices.
  • PCS personal
  • smart wearable devices are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait.
  • a smart wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories.
  • Smart wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • smart wearable devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be realized without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as various smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the terminal-side device may also include restricted devices, such as devices with limited power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • restricted devices such as devices with limited power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • the terminal-side device may also be a virtual reality (VR) device, an augmented reality (AR) device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, or a wireless terminal in driverless.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • Wireless terminal in remote medical surgery wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, smart home (smart) Home) wireless terminals, etc.
  • the network side device can be a (radio) access network ((radio) access network, (R) AN) device.
  • the (R)AN device for example, includes a base station (for example, an access point), and may refer to a device that communicates with a wireless terminal through one or more cells through an air interface in an access network.
  • the (wireless) access network equipment can be used to convert the received air frames and Internet Protocol (IP) packets to each other, as a router between the terminal equipment and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include IP network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the (wireless) access network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • (wireless) access network equipment may include radio network controller (RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station) , BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) access point (access point, AP) etc.
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • base transceiver station base transceiver station
  • BTS home base station
  • home base station for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB
  • BBU baseband unit
  • Wi-Fi wireless fidelity
  • the (wireless) access network equipment may also include the evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node) in the long term evolution (LTE) system or the evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A). B).
  • the (wireless) access network equipment may also include the next generation node B (gNB) and the transmission and reception point (TRP) in the 5G system or the new radio (NR) system, Or transmission point (TP).
  • gNB next generation node B
  • TRP transmission and reception point
  • 5G system or the new radio (NR) system, Or transmission point (TP).
  • the (wireless) access network equipment may also include a centralized unit (CU) and/or a distributed unit (DU) in a cloud radio access network (CloudRAN) system, Or, it may also be a node in an integrated access backhaul (IAB) system, or a road site unit (RSU) in a vehicle network system.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • CloudRAN cloud radio access network
  • IAB integrated access backhaul
  • RSU road site unit
  • Dual connectivity also known as cross-base station carrier aggregation, means that a terminal device is connected to two access network devices (such as a base station) at the same time.
  • the two access network devices connected by the terminal device can be access network devices under the same wireless access technology, for example, both are base stations in a long term evolution (LTE) communication system or both are base stations in a 5G communication system , Or the two access network devices connected by the terminal device may also be base stations under different wireless access technologies, for example, one is a base station in an LTE communication system, and the other is a base station in a 5G communication system.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • Carrier aggregation in this application specifically refers to carrier aggregation within a base station.
  • the CA technology can aggregate multiple component carriers (CC) together to provide services for one terminal device, realize a larger transmission bandwidth, and effectively increase the uplink and downlink transmission rates.
  • CC component carriers
  • Radio bearer The terminal device and the network device establish at least one radio bearer (RB) to transmit data.
  • Radio bearers can be divided into a signaling radio bearer (SRB) mainly used to transmit signaling and a data radio bearer (DRB) mainly used to transmit service data.
  • SRB signaling radio bearer
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the logical channel is associated with the cell, also known as the logical channel with the carrier, including but not limited to, if certain cells are allowed to be used in the configuration of the logical channel, it means that the data transmitted in the logical channel can be used in these Transmission on cells, or resources on these cells can be allocated to the logical channel, at this time, it can be called that the logical channel is associated with these cells. Or, it can be understood that the data transmitted in the logical channel is not transmitted in a cell other than the cell associated with the logical channel.
  • each logical channel may have an association relationship with a cell, or each logical channel may not have an association relationship with a cell. For example, in some scenarios, if the logical channel is not configured with an association relationship with a cell, the data transmitted in the logical channel can be transmitted on any cell.
  • a parameter can be configured for the logical channel, and different cells can be indicated by the value of the parameter, which means that the data transmitted in the logical channel can only be transmitted on the cell specified by the parameter.
  • parameter A can be used to indicate the cell configured for each logical channel. For example, if parameter A is configured for logical channel 1, and parameter A indicates cells 1 and 2, then it indicates that the cell is transmitted in logical channel 1. Data can only be transmitted on cells 1 and 2. In this way, the logical channel 1 and the cells indicated by the parameter A (cell 1 and cell 2) can be said to have an association relationship, or a binding relationship or a mapping relationship.
  • Repeated transmission usually refers to copying the same data packet carried by the radio into multiple identical packets (that is, repeated packets) at the PDCP layer, and then these two data packets are submitted to multiple different RLC entities for transmission, and then It is transmitted to the MAC layer through different logical channels.
  • the logical channel is the channel from the RLC layer to the MAC layer.
  • retransmission refers to retransmission
  • the duplication transmission in the embodiment of the present application is not retransmission.
  • Retransmission refers to sending the same data packet again after failure, or sending the same data packet multiple times in succession, and repeated transmission is to copy one data packet to two data packets and put them on two logical channels for transmission.
  • "Repetition" here can also be understood as "copy”.
  • multiple refers to two or more than two. In view of this, “multiple” can also be understood as “at least two” in the embodiments of this application. "At least one" can be understood as one or more, for example, one, two or more. For example, including at least one refers to including one, two or more, and does not limit which ones are included. For example, including at least one of A, B, and C, then the included can be A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority, or importance of multiple objects.
  • FIG. 1 is a structural diagram of an example of a wireless communication system involved in an embodiment of this application.
  • the wireless communication system includes a sending end and a receiving end, and the sending end and the receiving end perform data transmission through a wireless bearer.
  • the PDCP layer at the transmitting end and the PDCP layer at the receiving end correspond to a PDCP entity.
  • the PDCP entity is connected to at least two RLC entities.
  • Each RLC entity of the at least two RLC entities is associated with each other through an LCH.
  • At least one MAC entity It is explained here that each RLC entity is associated with one MAC entity through one LCH. When there are multiple MAC entities, different RLC entities may be associated with different MAC entities.
  • the sender and receiver respectively include the same PDCP entity, and a first RLC entity and a second RLC entity connected to the same PDCP entity, where the first RLC entity corresponds to the first LCH, and the second RLC entity Corresponds to the second LCH.
  • Each LCH is associated with at least one cell, or it can be understood that each LCH is associated with a cell group.
  • the first LCH is associated with cell a, cell b, and cell c
  • the second LCH is associated with cell d.
  • Cell e and cell f are associated, cell a, cell b, and cell c can be called cell group 1
  • cell d, cell e and cell f can be called cell group 2.
  • the sender sends the first LCH data to the receiver through any one or more cells in the cell group 1, and the sender sends data to the receiver through any one or more cells in the cell group 2.
  • the receiving end sends the data of the second LCH, and after the PDCP entity copies the data packet, the copied data packet is transmitted through the first RLC entity and the second RLC entity respectively.
  • the sending end may be a network side device, and the receiving end is a terminal side device, or, if the sending end is a terminal side device, the receiving end is a network side device.
  • the architecture may not be limited to including the sending end and the receiving end.
  • the architecture may also include a relay device or a device for carrying virtualized network functions, etc., which are obvious to a person of ordinary skill in the art, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer is described in the CA scenario and the DC scenario.
  • FIG. 2A is a network architecture diagram of an example of implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in a CA scenario.
  • the terminal-side device is connected to a network-side device, and the network-side device and the terminal-side device have the same network architecture for a radio bearer, that is, both include a PDCP entity and two RLC entities (respectively RLC1 and RLC2) and a MAC entity.
  • Two RLC entities are respectively associated with the MAC entity through different LCHs.
  • RLC1 is associated with the MAC entity through LCH1
  • RLC2 is associated with the MAC entity through LCH2.
  • An RLC entity and an LCH associated with a PDCP entity can be called "a leg".
  • the network side device configures two legs for a radio bearer, and LCH1 and RLC1 are one leg. , LCH2 and RLC2 are the other legs.
  • PDCP entity and “PDCP layer”, “RLC entity” and “RLC layer”, and “MAC entity” and “MAC layer” can be used interchangeably.
  • the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer configured for the radio bearer can be activated or deactivated (also referred to as activating or deactivating the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer).
  • the network-side device configures the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer for a certain radio bearer and activates the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer
  • the data packets of the radio bearer will be duplicated at the PDCP layer and will get two The same data packet is processed and transmitted through two legs, so as to be delivered to the same MAC entity.
  • the PDCP layer When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer of the radio bearer is deactivated, the PDCP layer does not copy the data packet of the radio bearer, and only sends the data packet of the radio bearer to one of the two legs for processing and transmission
  • the network side device can set one of the two legs as the primary leg and the other as the secondary leg.
  • the PDCP layer When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer is deactivated, the PDCP layer will send the data packet to the primary leg for processing And transmission.
  • the network side device can configure a corresponding cell for each LCH, so that data packets on the LCH can only be transmitted through the configured cell.
  • the network side device configures two cells for LCH1, namely CC1 and CC2, and also configures two cells for LCH2, namely CC3 and CC4.
  • the data on LCH1 can only be transmitted through the resources on CC1 and CC2
  • the data on LCH2 can only be transmitted through the resources on CC3 and CC4.
  • the PDCH layer When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer of the radio bearer is deactivated, the PDCH layer will send the data packet to the master leg (such as LCH1). At this time, the data on LCH1 can be transmitted on all the cells of the network side device , That is, it can be transmitted through any one or more cells among CC1 to CC4. It can be understood that the associated cell restriction configured by the network side device for each LCH takes effect only when the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer is activated.
  • FIG. 2B is a network architecture diagram of an example of implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in a DC scenario.
  • the DC scenario involves the primary network side device and the secondary network side device, then the primary network side device includes a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity for the radio bearer, as shown in RLC1 in Figure 2B And MAC1.
  • the secondary network side device also includes an RLC entity and a MAC entity, such as RLC2 and MAC2 in Fig. 2B.
  • the terminal device includes one PDCP entity, two RLC entities, and two MAC entities for the radio bearer, such as RLC1, MAC1, RLC2, and MAC2 in Figure 2B.
  • a terminal-side device is connected to two network-side devices at the same time, that is, the primary network-side device and the secondary network-side device.
  • the primary network-side device is configured with the PDCP layer repeated transmission function for a radio bearer, then
  • the two data packets copied by the PDCP layer will be transmitted to two different RLC entities, and transmitted to different MAC entities through different logical channels, and finally transmitted on different cells.
  • This process is the same for both the network side device and the terminal side device.
  • the PDCP layer in the main network side device will transmit the duplicated two data packets to different two devices.
  • Two RLC entities, these two RLC entities are located in the primary network side device and the secondary network side device respectively.
  • the RLC entity in the primary network side device transmits the received data packet to the MAC entity in the primary network side device.
  • the RLC entity in the side device transmits the received data packet to the MAC entity in the secondary network side device, and the two MAC entities will transmit the data packet through their respective cells.
  • the two RLC entities and the two MAC entities are located in the terminal device, and the other processes are the same.
  • the primary network side device can configure the corresponding cell for the LCH in the primary leg, for example, configure CC1 and CC2 for LCH1
  • the secondary network side device can configure the corresponding cell for the LCH in the secondary leg, for example, configure CC3 and CC4 for LCH2
  • the multiple cells configured by the primary network side device can be called a master cell group (MCG)
  • the multiple cells configured by the secondary network side device can be called a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG).
  • the terminal-side device can transmit different data packets to the primary network-side device and the secondary network-side device through the two logical channels of the terminal-side device.
  • the PDCP layer copies the data packet and transmits it through two logical channels.
  • the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer configured for the radio bearer is deactivated, it returns Return to DC split bearer operation.
  • the network side device can configure more legs for a radio bearer for repeated transmission.
  • a radio bearer for example, three legs can be configured for a radio bearer, as shown in Figure 3A.
  • RLC1 to RLC3 are respectively connected to PDCP entities, and RLC1 to RLC3 are respectively associated with the same MAC entity through LCH1 to LCH3.
  • four legs can be configured for one radio bearer, as shown in Figure 3B.
  • RLC1 to RLC4 are respectively connected to PDCP entities
  • RLC1 and RLC2 are respectively associated with MAC1 through LCH1 and LCH2
  • RLC3 and RLC4 are respectively associated with MAC2 through LCH3 and LCH4.
  • more legs can be configured for a radio bearer, which will not be explained here.
  • the network side device configures more legs for a radio bearer for repeated transmission, if the data transmission quality of the multiple legs is better, using the multiple legs to repeatedly transmit the same data packet will cause waste of resources. Therefore, how to balance the transmission quality and resource utilization in the repeated transmission function is a problem to be solved urgently.
  • the present application provides a data transmission method to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization when multiple logical channels are configured for a radio bearer.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • S401 The terminal side device sends capability indication information to the network side device, and the network side device receives the capability indication information.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal-side device supports the function of determining the logical channel used for data transmission (or, it can be understood as whether the terminal-side device has the function of determining the logical channel used for data transmission. ability).
  • the terminal-side device may indicate to the network-side device whether the terminal-side device supports the function determined to be used for data transmission by sending the capability indication information. For example, if the terminal-side device supports this function, it sends the capability indication information to the network-side device. If the terminal-side device does not support this function, it does not send the indication information to the network-side device. In this way, the network-side device can determine whether it receives The capability indication information of the terminal-side device determines that the terminal-side device supports the function, that is, if the capability indication information is received, the network-side device determines to support the function; otherwise, the network-side device determines that the terminal-side device does not support the function.
  • the terminal-side device may indicate to the network-side device whether the terminal-side device supports the function determined for data transmission through the content carried in the capability indication information. For example, the value of a field (or a bit) in the capability indication information may be used to indicate whether the terminal-side device supports the function.
  • the network-side device receives the capability indication information, when it determines whether the value of the field in the capability indication information is a preset value, if yes, it determines that the terminal-side device supports the function; otherwise, it determines that the terminal-side device This feature is not supported.
  • the terminal side device supports this function as an example for description.
  • step S401 is an optional step, that is, it is not required to be performed.
  • all terminal-side devices can be configured to support this function. In this case, the instruction information need not be sent.
  • step S401 is taken as a dotted line to indicate that this step is optional.
  • the network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
  • the first configuration signaling is used to indicate the function of configuring the radio bearer of the terminal side device to repeatedly transmit on at least two logical channels.
  • the first configuration signaling may include the identification of the radio bearer of the terminal-side device, the configuration of the PDCP entity corresponding to the radio bearer, the configuration of the RLC entity configured for the radio bearer, and the LCH corresponding to the RLC entity At least one of the identification and configuration of the MAC entity and the configuration of the MAC entity.
  • the first configuration information includes RLC1 to RLC4 used for repeated transmission by radio bearer X, LCH1 to LCH4 corresponding to RLC1 to RLC4 one-to-one, and a MAC entity.
  • the terminal side device After the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling, then Create a corresponding RLC entity and MAC entity for the radio bearer X, and establish the corresponding relationship between the RLC entity, the LCH, and the MAC entity to obtain the CA scenario as shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the first configuration signaling it may also indicate the main LCH of the at least two LCHs configured for the terminal-side device.
  • the first configuration signaling indicates that LCH1 is the primary LCH of the terminal side device, and when the repeat transmission function of the radio bearer is deactivated, the PDCP entity will send the data to LCH1, but not to other LCHs on. Since the LCH and the RLC entity have a one-to-one correspondence, the indication of the main LCH of the at least two LCHs can also be understood as indicating the main leg of the at least two legs configured for the radio bearer of the terminal side device.
  • the network side device may not configure the main LCH (or main leg) for the radio bearer, and there is no restriction here.
  • the LCH can be divided into an uplink LCH and a downlink LCH, and one LCH identifier can be used to identify a group of LCHs (that is, an uplink LCH and a downlink LCH corresponding to the uplink LCH).
  • the terminal-side device needs to send uplink data to the network-side device, it transmits it through the uplink LCH.
  • the network-side device needs to send the downlink data to the terminal-side device, it transmits it through the downlink LCH.
  • one LCH can be understood as a group of LCHs sharing one LCH identity.
  • S403 The network side device sends the second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
  • the second configuration signaling is used to instruct to configure the associated (or mapped) cell for each LCH.
  • the network-side device configures the associated serving cell for LCH1 to ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇ , configures the associated serving cell for LCH2 to ⁇ CC4, CC5, CC6 ⁇ , and configures the associated serving cell for LCH3
  • the serving cell of is ⁇ CC7, CC8, CC9 ⁇
  • the associated serving cell for LCH4 configuration is ⁇ CC10, CC11, CC12 ⁇ .
  • the data sent by the PDCP entity of the terminal side device to a certain LCH can only be transmitted through the resources of the serving cell associated with the LCH, for example, the data on LCH1 It can only be transmitted through the resources on CC1 to CC3, and the data on LCH2 can only be transmitted through the resources on CC4 to CC6, and so on.
  • the second configuration signaling may also be used to indicate that the associated (or mapped) cell group is configured for each LCH.
  • multiple serving cells included in the network side device are divided into multiple cell groups in advance, for example, ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇ is cell group 1, ⁇ CC4, CC5, CC6 ⁇ is cell group 2, etc., Then the second configuration signaling may indicate that the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, and the cell group associated with LCH2 is cell group 2, and so on, and will not be repeated here.
  • first configuration signaling and the second configuration signaling may be radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, and may be medium access control control element (MAC CE) signaling. Or, it can also be other signaling, which is not limited here.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC CE medium access control control element
  • step S403 is an optional step, that is, it is not necessary to be performed.
  • the cell or cell group associated with each LCH is preset, that is, the network side device only needs to configure the LCH for repeated transmission for the radio bearer, and the data on the LCH will use the preset The resources in the cell are transmitted.
  • the first configuration signaling and the second configuration signaling may also be the same configuration signaling, that is, the first configuration signaling indicates that the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with the repeated transmission function and the repeated transmission
  • Each LCH in the transmission function configures the associated cell.
  • a certain parameter in the first configuration signaling may be used to indicate the cell group configured for each LCH.
  • the parameter may be the allowedServingCells parameter.
  • step S403 is taken as a dotted line to indicate that this step is optional.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel of the at least two logical channels.
  • the at least two logical channels are multiple LCHs configured by the network side device for the radio bearer X of the terminal side device in step S402, namely, LCH1 to LCH4.
  • a logical channel in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a group of logical channels (ie, uplink logical channel and downlink logical channel) sharing a logical channel identifier
  • the uplink data transmission quality of a logical channel can be It is understood that the data transmission quality of the uplink logical channel corresponding to the logical channel identifier.
  • the uplink logical channel and the downlink logical channel are associated (or mapped) to the same cell group.
  • the data transmission quality of a logical channel can be measured by the channel quality of the cell group associated with the logical channel .
  • the uplink data transmission quality of a logical channel can be measured by the uplink channel quality of the cell group associated with the logical channel.
  • the uplink channel quality is inferred by the network side device by monitoring the uplink reference signal of the terminal side device in the cell or the strength of the uplink signal sent by the terminal side device on the cell.
  • the uplink channel quality and downlink channel quality of a cell are usually related to a certain extent.
  • the uplink channel quality and downlink channel quality of the cell are both better. If the channel quality of the cell is poor , Then the uplink channel quality and downlink channel quality of the cell are relatively poor, and there is a low probability that the uplink channel quality of a cell is good but the downlink channel quality is poor, or the uplink channel quality is poor but the downlink channel quality is good. From this point of view, by measuring the downlink channel quality of the cell, the uplink channel quality of the cell can also be deduced.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the connection with the first logical channel.
  • the downlink channel quality of the cell group associated with the channel represents the uplink data transmission quality of the first logical channel.
  • the data transmission quality of the first logical channel includes but is not limited to at least one or more of the following information:
  • the first logical channel is LCH1
  • the cell group associated (or mapped) with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇
  • the terminal-side device first obtains each cell in cell group 1.
  • the downlink channel quality of CC1 obtained by the terminal-side device is channel quality 1
  • the downlink channel quality of CC2 is channel quality 2
  • the downlink channel quality of CC3 is channel quality 3.
  • the terminal-side device determines the channel quality 1>channel quality 2>channel quality 3, the downlink channel quality of LCH1 is determined to be channel quality 1.
  • the first logical channel is LCH1
  • the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇
  • the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1.
  • the terminal side device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3.
  • the terminal side device obtains the downlink channels of these 3 cells
  • the average value of the quality is (channel quality 1+channel quality 2+channel quality 3)/3, and it is determined that the average value is the downlink channel quality of LCH1.
  • the K cells are the first K cells sorted from high to low in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the value of K is 2 for description.
  • the first logical channel is LCH1
  • the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇
  • the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1, for example, the terminal side
  • the device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3.
  • the terminal-side device according to the size of the downlink channel quality of the 3 cells, sequentially Sort the quality of these 3 downlink channels.
  • the terminal-side device judges that channel quality 1>channel quality 2>channel quality 3, and the sorted 3 downlink channel qualities are: channel quality 1, channel quality 2, channel quality 3. From these 3 channel qualities choose the first two, namely channel quality 1 and channel quality 2, find the average of these two channel qualities, namely (channel quality 1 + channel quality 2)/2, and determine that the average is the downlink channel quality of LCH1 .
  • K may be predefined by the protocol, or may be indicated by the network side device to the terminal side device through configuration information.
  • the configuration information may be a system message or RRC dedicated signaling, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the value of K may correspond to the first logical channel.
  • the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, and each logical channel corresponds to a value of K, that is, LCH1 corresponds to K1, LCH2 corresponds to K2, LCH3 corresponds to K3, and LCH4 corresponds to K4.
  • a value of K is independently configured for each logical channel (ie, per leg configuration).
  • the value of K may correspond to the radio bearer.
  • the values of K corresponding to the 4 logical channels are the same, but different radio bearers, for example, radio bearer X and radio bearer Y can correspond to different K Value (that is, per RB configuration).
  • the value of K may also correspond to the terminal-side device, that is, the value of K corresponding to any logical channel configured for any radio bearer of the terminal-side device is the same, and different terminal-side devices, For example, the first terminal-side device and the second terminal-side device may correspond to different values of K (that is, per UE configuration).
  • the first logical channel is LCH1
  • the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇
  • the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1.
  • the terminal side device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3, and then compares the downlink channel quality of these three cells with the pre- Set the relationship between the threshold value and determine the downlink channel quality greater than the preset threshold from the three downlink channel qualities.
  • the terminal-side device determines that channel quality 1 and channel quality 2 are both greater than the preset threshold, the terminal-side device Obtain the average value of channel quality 1 and channel quality 2, that is, (channel quality 1+channel quality 2)/2, and determine that the average value is the downlink channel quality of LCH1.
  • the preset threshold may be predefined by the protocol, or indicated by the network side device through configuration information, and the preset threshold may be per leg configuration or per RB configuration or per UE configuration.
  • the configuration method can refer to the setting method of K in the third case, which will not be repeated here.
  • the foregoing preset threshold may also correspond to a cell/carrier, that is, configured per cell/carrier, and different cells/carriers may independently configure the preset threshold.
  • the P second cells are the channel quality of the cell group exceeding the preset threshold and are sorted according to the channel quality from high to low.
  • P is an integer greater than 1 and less than or equal to K.
  • the first logical channel is LCH1
  • the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes ⁇ CC1, CC2, CC3 ⁇
  • the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1.
  • the terminal side device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3, and then compares the downlink channel quality of these three cells with the pre- Set the relationship between the threshold value and determine the downlink channel quality greater than the preset threshold from the three downlink channel qualities.
  • the terminal side device determines that channel quality 1 to channel quality 3 are all greater than the preset threshold, and channel quality 1 > Channel quality 2> Channel quality 3. Assuming the value of P is 2, the terminal side device obtains the average value of channel quality 1 and channel quality 2, that is, (channel quality 1+channel quality 2)/2, and determines that the average value is the downlink channel quality of LCH1.
  • the number of cells in the cell group whose channel quality exceeds the preset threshold may be greater than the value of P, or may be less than the value of P.
  • the number of cells in the cell group whose channel quality exceeds the preset threshold is less than
  • the number of cells used to determine the channel quality of the cell group will be smaller than the value of P. Therefore, in this case, the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel can be understood as the average of the channel quality of at most P second cells.
  • the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel may be the maximum value of the channel quality of all cells.
  • the configuration mode of P is the same as the configuration mode of K, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device can derive the data transmission failure rate and success rate of the first logical channel through an acknowledgement message (acknowledge, ACK) or non-acknowledgement (NACK) fed back by the RLC status report. For example, obtaining the total number of data transmissions N1 within a preset duration (for example, 5 minutes), the total number of received ACKs is N2, and the total number of received NACKs is N3, then the data transmission failure rate of the first logical channel It is N3/N1, if the data transmission failure rate is greater, it means that the channel quality of the first logical channel is worse.
  • the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel can also be obtained. For example, the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel is N2/N1. If the data transmission success rate is greater, it means the channel of the first logical channel The better the quality.
  • the foregoing preset duration may be configured by the network-side device, or may be selected by the terminal-side device or configured in advance, which is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device may derive the data transmission failure rate and the success rate of the first logical channel through the ACK or NACK fed back by the HARQ at the MAC layer.
  • the specific method is the same as the data transmission failure rate and the success rate of the first logical channel obtained by deriving the ACK or NACK feedback from the RLC status report, and will not be repeated here.
  • the data transmission failure rate and success rate of the first logical channel are derived by scheduling new transmission resources or retransmission resources by the network side device. For example, acquiring the total number of times N1 that the network-side device schedules resources for the terminal-side device within a preset time period (for example, 5 minutes), where the total number of times for scheduling new transmission resources is N2, and the total number of times for scheduling retransmission resources is N3, then The data transmission failure rate of the first logical channel is N3/N1. If the data transmission failure rate is greater, it means that the channel quality of the first logical channel is worse.
  • the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel can also be obtained. For example, the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel is N2/N1. If the data transmission success rate is greater, it means the channel of the first logical channel The better the quality.
  • the downlink channel quality of the first logical channel can be represented by any one of the above six types of information, or the first logical channel can also be comprehensively represented based on the combination of multiple types of information in the above six types of information.
  • the downlink channel quality of the logical channel is not limited here. Of course, other methods can also be used to obtain the downlink channel quality of each logical channel, and no examples are given here.
  • the terminal-side device can determine the downlink channel quality of each logical channel through the sixth method, and then inversely deduct the uplink channel quality of each logical channel according to the downlink channel quality, and the terminal-side device also
  • the quality of uplink data transmission can be directly obtained in the sixth way, for example, the RLC status report that the network side device feeds back to the terminal side device's uplink transmission data, or the HARQ feedback result, or the determination based on the network side device scheduling new transmission or retransmission resources
  • the transmission quality of the uplink logical channel of the, etc. will not be repeated here.
  • the above 6 types of information are described as an example in which the larger the value of the acquired information, the better the data transmission quality of the first logical channel. In some embodiments, the smaller the value of the acquired information, the better the downlink channel quality of the first logical channel.
  • the information in 6 above should be adjusted adaptively, for example, the first This information should be replaced with "get the minimum channel quality of all cells in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel", and the fourth information should be replaced with "the channel of at least one first cell in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel"
  • the average value of the quality, the channel quality of each first cell is less than or equal to the preset threshold" and so on.
  • the embodiments of the present application should also include this situation, and will not be described here.
  • the channel quality of a cell includes the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) or reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ) of the reference signal measured by the terminal-side device in the cell.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • RSRQ reference signal receiving quality
  • SINR Signal to interference and noise ratio
  • RSSI received signal strength indication
  • the reference signal measured on one cell can be a synchronization signal block (SSB), and measured on another cell
  • the received reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), and the transmit power and occupied frequency domain bandwidth of different types of reference signals may be different.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the terminal side equipment only compares or averages the measurement results of the reference signals in different cells, it may cause large errors. Therefore, in order to effectively measure the channel quality of different cells, The following two processing methods can be used in the embodiments of this application:
  • the terminal-side device uses the same type of reference signal to measure the channel quality of the cell group respectively corresponding to the at least two logical channels.
  • the reference signal used to measure the channel quality of the cells in each cell group may be pre-configured or indicated by the network side device through configuration signaling.
  • the network side device may configure each cell in a cell group to use the same type of reference signal.
  • the reference signal configured by the network side device for cell group 1 is SSB
  • the reference signal configured by the network side device for cell group 2 is CSI-RS.
  • SSB will be used
  • CSI-RS will be used when measuring the channel quality of each cell in cell group 2. In this way, the error of the channel quality measured in a cell group can be reduced.
  • the network-side device may configure the cell group associated with each logical channel of the radio bearer X to use the same reference signal.
  • the reference signal configured by the network side device for cell group 1 to cell group 4 is SSB.
  • the terminal side device will use SSB when measuring the channel quality of each cell, which can reduce the channel quality measured by different cell groups. error.
  • the terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell groups respectively corresponding to the at least two logical channels.
  • the terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels, the terminal-side device determines the cell group that uses the first type of reference signal for measurement
  • the channel quality of (may be called the first cell group) is the sum of the measurement result obtained by the terminal device in the cell group and the preset offset, and the first type of reference signal is among the different types of reference signals
  • One of the types of reference signals may be specified by the protocol or instructed by the network side device or selected by the terminal device.
  • the terminal-side device may use one of the types of reference signals as a reference, for example, CSI-RS as a reference. If the reference signal measured by a cell is not a CSI-RS, such as SSB, the terminal-side device After obtaining the measurement result of the cell, a preset offset value ⁇ is added to the measurement result. Take the terminal-side equipment measuring the RSRP of each cell as an example. Cell group 1 includes cell 1 and cell 2. The terminal-side equipment measures CSI-RS on cell 1 and the RSRP value is RSRP1. The terminal-side equipment measures SSB on cell 2.
  • the terminal device needs to process the measurement result of cell 2 to obtain the final measurement result of cell 2 as RSRP2+ ⁇ , and then compare RSRP1 with RSRP2+ ⁇ or perform an average operation to obtain the cell group The channel quality of 1.
  • the preset offset value can be pre-defined by the protocol or configured by the network side device.
  • the preset offset value can be positive or negative or zero.
  • the specific value can be obtained through multiple measurement experiments. Get it, I won’t repeat it here.
  • the measurement result of the terminal-side device on a cell can be the value directly measured by the physical layer of the terminal-side device (it can be understood as the L1 (layer 1) measurement result), or it can be the value that the terminal-side device passes through The value in the RRC layer obtained after filtering and smoothing (can be understood as the L3 (layer 3) measurement result).
  • the measurement result of the terminal-side device on a cell can be used directly, or it can be converted to a corresponding value on the unit bandwidth and then used. For example, taking RSRP as an example, after the terminal-side device measures RSRP on a cell, it can convert the measured RSRP into signal received power per unit bandwidth and then use it.
  • the terminal-side device After the terminal-side device obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell group, it can directly use the downlink channel quality as the uplink channel quality of the cell group, or it can preset the downlink channel quality, for example, add
  • the upper fixed value is used as the uplink channel quality of the cell.
  • the fixed value can be pre-configured or can be configured through system information or RRC signaling, which is not limited here.
  • the network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device receives the first instruction.
  • the first indication is used to indicate at least one transmission quality threshold, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine a logical channel used for repeated transmission.
  • the transmission quality threshold can be understood as the aforementioned RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI threshold.
  • the first indication may be carried in RRC signaling, and may be included in the same control signaling as the first configuration signaling in step S402 and/or the second configuration signaling in S403.
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold is different according to the type of logical channel (primary logical channel or auxiliary logical channel) configured by the network side device for the radio bearer, and may include but is not limited to the following four situations.
  • the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold includes N first transmission quality thresholds and M*N second transmission quality thresholds, and the N The first transmission quality thresholds are associated with the primary logical channel
  • the M*N second transmission quality thresholds are associated with the at least one secondary logical channel
  • M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the network side device when the network side device configures multiple logical channels for repeated transmission for the radio bearer of the terminal device, and one of the multiple logical channels is configured as the primary logical channel (or, the multiple leg One of the legs is configured as the main leg), the network side device can set multiple transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel and the auxiliary logical channel respectively. For example, N first transmission quality thresholds are configured for the primary logical channel, and M*N second transmission thresholds are configured for at least one secondary logical channel.
  • the network side device may configure three first transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3.
  • the three first transmission quality thresholds can correspond to the three second transmission quality thresholds one-to-one, that is, T1 corresponds to T1', T2 corresponds to T2', and T3 corresponds to T3'.
  • the specific value of each transmission quality threshold can be based on Set it up in actual use.
  • the network side device may configure three first transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3, respectively.
  • Configure three second transmission quality thresholds for each secondary logical channel in at least one secondary logical channel that is, if the radio bearer includes M secondary logical channels, the network side device configures M groups of M secondary logical channels
  • the second transmission quality threshold, each group of second transmission quality thresholds corresponds to a secondary logical channel.
  • the three first transmission quality thresholds respectively correspond to the three second transmission quality thresholds configured for each auxiliary logical channel one-to-one.
  • the network-side device configures three first transmission quality thresholds and three second transmission quality thresholds for the terminal-side device.
  • the three first transmission quality thresholds are the same as those included in the terminal-side device.
  • the three second transmission thresholds correspond to all the secondary logical channels of the radio bearer included in the terminal-side device.
  • the second case is a first case
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to each of the at least two logical channels. In other words, the at least one transmission quality threshold can be applied to each logical channel.
  • the network side device configures a set of transmission quality thresholds for the radio bearer.
  • the set of transmission quality thresholds may include at least one transmission quality threshold. For example, it may include 3 transmission quality thresholds. All logical channels of the radio bearer correspond. That is, the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, and the 4 logical channels share a set of transmission quality thresholds. In this case, it can also be said that the network side device uses the per RB method to configure the transmission quality threshold. Different radio bearers can independently configure the transmission quality threshold.
  • the network side device configures a set of transmission quality thresholds for the terminal side device.
  • the set of transmission quality thresholds may include at least one transmission quality threshold. For example, it may include 3 transmission quality thresholds.
  • the threshold corresponds to all radio bearers included in the terminal-side device. That is, multiple radio bearers of the terminal-side device share a set of transmission quality thresholds. In this case, it can also be said that the network side device uses the per UE mode to configure the transmission quality threshold.
  • the at least two logical channels include a main logical channel and at least one auxiliary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is associated with the main logical channel.
  • the network-side device may configure the corresponding transmission quality threshold only for the primary logical channel. For example, configure 3 transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3.
  • the number of the at least two logical channels is K
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold is divided into K groups
  • the K logical channels are in one-to-one correspondence with the K groups of transmission quality thresholds
  • K is greater than or equal to 2. Integer.
  • the network side device will configure a set of transmission quality thresholds for each logical channel. For example, if the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, the network side device configures 4 sets of transmission for the radio bearer Quality thresholds, each group of transmission quality thresholds includes 3 transmission quality thresholds, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3. In this case, it can also be said that the network-side device uses the per leg method to configure the transmission quality threshold.
  • the number of transmission quality thresholds included in a set of transmission quality thresholds may be related to the number of logical channels configured by the network side device for the radio bearer.
  • the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, then the network side device can set 3 transmission quality thresholds in a set of transmission quality thresholds, for example, configure a set of first transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel , Then the group of first transmission quality thresholds includes 3 transmission quality thresholds.
  • the network side device can set 2 transmission quality thresholds in a set of transmission quality thresholds, for example, configure a set of first transmissions for the main logical channel Quality threshold, the first transmission quality threshold of the group includes 2 transmission quality thresholds.
  • the network side device configures multiple transmission quality thresholds for the radio bearer of the terminal side device, and there is a correspondence between the multiple transmission quality thresholds and logical channels, for example, the first set of transmission quality thresholds corresponds to the primary logical channel, The two sets of transmission quality thresholds correspond to the first secondary logical channel, and so on, the network side device may also carry the correspondence between the transmission quality threshold and the logical channel in the first indication, and the specific manner is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device determines a logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
  • the terminal-side device may determine the logical channel used for data transmission according to the comparison result between the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
  • the radio bearer X of the terminal side device is configured with 4 logical channels by the network side device as an example, and a set of transmission quality thresholds configured by the network side device includes 3 transmission quality thresholds as an example.
  • the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and three secondary logical channels
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold includes three first transmissions corresponding to the primary logical channel.
  • the quality thresholds are marked as T1, T2, and T3
  • the three second transmission quality thresholds corresponding to all secondary logical channels are marked as T1', T2', and T3', respectively.
  • T1 can be understood as the first first transmission quality threshold (or the maximum threshold) after sorting the multiple first transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the main logical channel from small to large
  • T2 can be understood as, The second threshold after sorting the multiple first transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the main logical channel from small to large, the meaning of T3 can also be deduced by analogy
  • T1' can be understood as the first second transmission quality threshold (or the maximum threshold) after sorting the multiple second transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the secondary logical channel from small to large, the meaning of T2' and T3' It can be deduced by analogy, so I won't repeat it here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that the primary logical channel is used for data transmission;
  • the terminal side equipment Determine that the primary logical channel and one of the at least one first secondary logical channel are used for data transmission.
  • one secondary logical channel determined to be used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality among the at least one first secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly selected from the at least one first secondary logical channel.
  • a determined secondary logical channel, or a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device determines the main logical channel and one of the at least one second auxiliary logical channel.
  • Logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • one secondary logical channel determined to be used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one second secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly selected from the at least one second secondary logical channel.
  • a determined secondary logical channel, or a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T3, and the uplink data transmission quality of at least two of the three secondary logical channels is greater than or equal to T3', the terminal side The device determines that the primary logical channel and two of the at least two third secondary logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the method for selecting the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the data transmission quality of at least two of the three secondary logical channels is greater than or equal to T2', the terminal-side device determines the primary logical channel and the at least two fourth secondary logical channels Two of the logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the method for selecting the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and three secondary logical channels
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold is applicable to each logical channel
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold Includes 3 transmission quality thresholds, marked as T1, T2, and T3.
  • T1, T2, and T3 can also adopt the understanding mode in the first determination mode, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel of the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T1, and the at least one first logical channel includes the primary logical channel, the terminal-side device determines that the primary logical channel is used For data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one second logical channel of the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T1, and the at least one second logical channel does not include the main logical channel, the terminal-side device determines the main The logical channel and one of the at least one second logical channel are used for data transmission.
  • one secondary logical channel determined to be used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one second secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly selected from the at least one second secondary logical channel.
  • a determined secondary logical channel, or a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least two third logical channels in the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, and the primary logical channel is included in the at least two third secondary logical channels, the terminal-side device determines The primary logical channel and one of the at least two third logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the selection method of the secondary logical channel is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least two fourth logical channels in the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, and the primary logical channel is not included in the at least two fourth secondary logical channels, the terminal-side device Determine that the primary logical channel and the two secondary logical channels of the at least two fourth logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the selection of the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least three fifth logical channels is greater than or equal to T3, and the at least three fifth logical channels include the primary logical channel .
  • the terminal-side device determines that two of the primary logical channel and at least three fifth logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the method for selecting the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the at least three sixth logical channels is greater than or equal to T3, and the at least three sixth logical channels do not include the main logical channel Channel, the terminal side device determines all logical channels for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold is applicable to each logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes three transmission quality thresholds, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3, and the network side device
  • the primary logical channel is not configured.
  • T1, T2, and T3 can also adopt the understanding mode in the first determination mode, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or equal to T1
  • the terminal-side device determines that one of the at least one first logical channel is used for data transmission, where
  • the first logical channel to be transmitted may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one first secondary logical channel, or it may be a secondary logical channel randomly determined from the at least one first secondary logical channel , Or, a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, and there is no restriction here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least two second logical channels is greater than or equal to T2
  • the terminal-side device determines that two of the at least two second logical channels are used for data transmission, wherein, the method for selecting the two second logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least three third logical channels is greater than or equal to T3
  • the terminal-side device determines that among the at least three third logical channels
  • the three third logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the selection method of the three third logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to the primary logical channel
  • the at least one transmission quality threshold includes
  • the three transmission quality thresholds are marked as T1, T2, and T3, respectively. Among them, T1, T2, and T3 can also adopt the understanding method in the first determination method, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that the primary logical channel is used for data transmission;
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T2 if the terminal-side device determines that one of the primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel is used for data transmission.
  • the secondary logical channel for data transmission may be randomly selected or at least one of the secondary logical channels with the best uplink data transmission quality, or a logical channel selected by the terminal side device itself, which is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T3, the terminal-side device determines that two of the primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel are used for data transmission.
  • the method for selecting the two secondary logical channels for data transmission is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • step S405 it is similar to the foregoing second determining method and third determining method, and will not be repeated here.
  • each logical channel corresponds to a set of transmission quality thresholds
  • the terminal device needs to use it when determining whether a logical channel meets one of the above conditions.
  • the transmission quality threshold corresponding to the logical channel For example, in the second determination method, when the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one of the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T1, it only needs to compare the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel with T1 can be compared.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or equal to T1
  • T1 in a set of transmission quality thresholds corresponding to a logical channel whether the uplink data transmission quality of the second logical channel is greater than or equal to T1 in a set of transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the second logical channel, until every traverse Only after a logical channel can it be determined whether the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or equal to T1.
  • T1 in a set of transmission quality thresholds corresponding to a logical channel whether the uplink data transmission quality of the second logical channel is greater than or equal to T1 in a set of transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the second logical channel, until every traverse Only after a logical channel can it be determined whether the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or
  • the terminal side device sends a second instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the second instruction.
  • the second indication includes an identifier of the radio bearer and a bit sequence, and the bit sequence is used to indicate the logical channel used for data transmission among the at least two logical channels.
  • the terminal side device may send an indication of the logical channel used for data transmission to the network side device.
  • the second indication may be MAC CE signaling, or RRC signaling, or may also be other signaling, which is not limited here.
  • the second indication includes 8 bits (b7 to b0), and the first 4 bits (b7 to b4) are used to indicate the identity of the radio bearer X, for example, an index number or ID. For example, if the identifier of the radio bearer X is 1101, the values of b7 to b4 are "1101" in order.
  • the last 4 bits (b3 ⁇ b0) are used to indicate whether multiple logical channels of the radio bearer X are used for data transmission.
  • b3 is used to indicate whether the first logical channel (ie LCH1) is used for data transmission
  • b2 is used to indicate whether the second logical channel (ie LCH2) is used for data transmission
  • b3 is used to indicate the third logical channel ( That is, whether LCH3) is used for data transmission
  • b4 is used to indicate whether the fourth logical channel (ie, LCH4) is used for data transmission.
  • the terminal side determines that LCH1 and LCH3 are used for data transmission, the values of b3 to b0 are sequentially "1010". Wherein, when the value of any one of the bits b3 to b0 is 1, it indicates that the logical channel corresponding to the bit is used for data transmission, otherwise the logical channel is not used for data transmission.
  • the terminal side device can send the second instruction to the primary network side device and the secondary network side device respectively, or if there is only one network side device
  • the managed logical channel is used for data transmission, and the terminal-side device may also only send the second instruction to the network-side device.
  • step S407 is an optional step, that is, it is not necessary to be performed.
  • step S407 uses a dotted line to indicate that this step is optional.
  • the PDCP layer of the terminal device When the number of logical channels used for data transmission is equal to 1, the PDCP layer of the terminal device does not copy the data packet, but directly sends the data packet to the logical channel used for data transmission for transmission. In this case, it can be understood that the terminal side device does not perform repeated transmission.
  • the repeated transmission of the terminal-side device on the logical channel used for data transmission means that repeated data packets are sent on the determined logical channel for data transmission, but it does not affect the transmission failure on other logical channels.
  • Duplicate packets For example, if the terminal-side device determines that the logical channels used for data transmission are LCH1 and LCH2, the terminal-side device can send data packet 1 on LCH1 and LCH2, and the terminal-side device can send data packet 1 on LCH3 or LCH4 different from data packet 1. ⁇ 2;
  • the PDCP entity of the terminal side device may not send new data packets to LCH3 and LCH4.
  • step S407 and step S408 can be performed at the same time, or step S408 can be performed first and then step S407, etc.
  • the execution sequence in FIG. 4 is only an example, and should not be understood as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal-side device first estimates the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel based on the downlink data transmission quality of each logical channel carried by the radio, and then determines the data transmission quality according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel In this way, when the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is good, the terminal-side device can only select some of the logical channels for repeated transmission, so that a data packet on the air interface side is only retransmitted a few times , Thereby avoiding waste of resources. Moreover, when the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is poor, the terminal-side device can use all the logical channels for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission quality, thereby achieving a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization.
  • the network side device compared to the way that the network side device senses the channel quality change and then controls whether the logical channel is used for data transmission, the network side device generates instruction information, instructs data transmission and retransmission, and the terminal side processes the instruction information. For a certain period of time, the determination of the logical channel for data transmission by the terminal-side device can save the time required for the foregoing process, and therefore, it can respond to changes in channel conditions more quickly.
  • the logical channel used for data transmission is determined by the terminal-side device.
  • the network side device can also control the logical channel used for data transmission through signaling.
  • the process of data transmission by the terminal-side device when the network-side device controls the logical channel for data transmission through signaling will be introduced.
  • FIG. 7 a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal side device sends capability indication information to the network side device, and the network side device receives the capability indication information.
  • the network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
  • S703 The network side device sends second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
  • Steps S701 to S703 are similar to steps S401 to S403, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network side device sends a third instruction, and the terminal side device receives the third instruction.
  • the third indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at least the first part of the logical channels of the at least two logical channels configured for the radio bearer for repeated transmission.
  • the third indication may be MAC CE signaling or RRC signaling.
  • the third indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use LCH1 and LCH2 for repeated transmission.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel of the at least two logical channels.
  • S706 The network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device receives the first instruction.
  • Steps S705 to S706 are the same as steps S404 to S405, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines a logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
  • the multiple logical channels configured by the network side device for the radio bearer of the terminal side device can be divided into two parts.
  • the first part of the logical channel is the logical channel indicated in the third instruction sent by the network side device, for example ,
  • the first part of logical channels includes LCH1 and LCH2.
  • the second part is a logical channel of the plurality of logical channels other than the logical channel for data transmission/replication data transmission indicated in the third instruction.
  • the second part of logical channels includes LCH3 and LCH4.
  • the terminal-side device After determining the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel among the multiple logical channels, the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. In other words, the terminal-side device can only activate the second part of the logical channels for repeated transmission, but cannot deactivate the first part of the logical channels, or it can be understood that the terminal-side device uses at least the first part of the logical channels for repeated transmission.
  • the network-side device instructs LCH1 and LCH2 to be used for duplication transmission through MAC CE (third indication).
  • the terminal-side device determines that LCH1 and LCH2 cannot guarantee the quality of service of the radio bearer, for example, the uplink data transmission quality of LCH1 and LCH2 are both poor
  • the terminal-side device can base on the uplink data transmission quality of LCH3 and the uplink data transmission quality of LCH4 To determine whether LCH3 and/or LCH4 are used for data transmission.
  • the terminal side device determines that LCH3 is used for data transmission, so that the logical channels used for duplication transmission are changed from LCH1 and LCH2 to LCH1 to LCH3.
  • the dashed lines indicate logical channels not used for duplication transmission.
  • the terminal-side device may periodically perform step S707 according to a preset cycle, so as to determine whether it is necessary to add a logical channel for data transmission.
  • the manner in which the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel may include but is not limited to the following two methods.
  • the first determination method is similar to the method in step S406, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device can use the number of logical channels (or can be referred to as the logical channels activated by the third indication) indicated by the third indication for duplication transmission, and the uplink data transmission of each logical channel Quality determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel.
  • the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer of the terminal side device, the at least one transmission quality threshold is applicable to each logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes 3 transmission quality thresholds, respectively Labeled as T1, T2, and T3.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first part of logical channels is less than T3
  • the terminal-side device determines all the logical channels in the second part of logical channels The channel is used for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T2, and the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel in the second partial logical channel If the data transmission quality is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that one of the at least one first logical channel is used for data transmission.
  • the one logical channel used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one first secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly determined from the at least one first secondary logical channel
  • One of the secondary logical channels is not limited here.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first part of logical channels is less than T2, and one logical channel in the first part of logical channels and the second part of logical channels If the uplink data transmission quality of at least one second logical channel in the channels is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal side device determines that one logical channel of the at least one second logical channel is used for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T1, and the transmission quality of at least one third logical channel in the second partial logical channel If the uplink data transmission quality is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal side device determines that one of the at least one third logical channel is used for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first part of logical channels is less than T1, and one logical channel and the second part of the first part of logical channels If the data transmission quality of at least one fourth logical channel in the logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal side device determines that one logical channel in the at least one fourth logical channel is used for data transmission.
  • the terminal side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T1, and at least two fifth logical channels in the second partial logical channel If the uplink data transmission quality of is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal side device determines that two logical channels of the at least two fifth logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T1
  • the second partial logical channel is If the uplink data transmission quality of at least two sixth logical channels in the partial logical channels is greater than or equal to T3
  • the terminal side device determines that two logical channels of the at least two sixth logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the four logical channels do not satisfy all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels in the second part of the logical channels are used for data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device sends a second instruction to the network-side device, and the network-side device receives the second instruction.
  • the terminal-side device uses the logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel to perform repeated transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the logical channel used for data transmission is LCH3, the terminal-side device performs repeated transmission on LCH1 to LCH3.
  • the terminal-side device can determine whether to add additional logical channels for repeated transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, which can avoid the inability to guarantee due to the deterioration of the transmission quality of the logical channel activated by the network-side device The reliability of data transmission.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal side device sends capability indication information to the network side device, and the network side device receives the capability indication information.
  • the network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
  • the network side device sends the second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
  • Steps S901 to S903 are similar to steps S401 to S403, and will not be repeated here.
  • S904 The network side device sends a fourth instruction, and the terminal side device receives the fourth instruction.
  • the fourth indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at most the first part of the at least two logical channels for repeated transmission.
  • the fourth indication may be MAC CE signaling or RRC signaling.
  • the fourth indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use LCH1 and LCH2 for repeated transmission.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel of the at least two logical channels.
  • S906 The network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device receives the first instruction.
  • Step S905 to step S906 are the same as step S404 to step S405, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines a logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
  • the multiple logical channels configured by the network side device for the radio bearer of the terminal side device can be divided into two parts.
  • the first part of the logical channel is the logical channel indicated in the fourth instruction sent by the network side device, for example ,
  • the first part of logical channels includes LCH1 and LCH2.
  • the second part is a logical channel of the plurality of logical channels other than the logical channel indicated in the third indication.
  • the second part of logical channels includes LCH3 and LCH4.
  • the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
  • the terminal-side device can only deactivate the first part of the logical channels for repeated transmission, but cannot activate the second part of the logical channels, or it can be understood that the terminal-side equipment uses the first part of the logical channels for repeated transmission at most.
  • the network side device instructs LCH1 and LCH2 to be used for duplication transmission through MAC CE (fourth indication).
  • the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of LCH1 and LCH2 are both good, the terminal-side device can determine whether to use only LCH1 or LCH2 for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of LCH1 and the uplink data transmission quality of LCH2. For example, the terminal-side device determines that LCH2 is used for data transmission, so that the logical channel used for data transmission changes from LCH1 and LCH2 to LCH2. In Figure 10, the dashed line indicates that the logical channel is not used for data transmission.
  • step S707 the manner in which the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel is similar to that in step S707, and will not be repeated here.
  • S908 The terminal side device sends a second instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the second instruction.
  • the terminal-side device uses the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel to perform data transmission.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channels is 1, for example, LCH2, the terminal-side device performs data transmission on LCH2. In this case, repeated transmission is not performed.
  • the terminal-side device determines that the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel is greater than 1, the terminal-side device performs repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel.
  • the terminal-side device can determine whether to deactivate the logical channel for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, which can avoid the time when the transmission quality of the logical channel activated by the network-side device is good.
  • the network side device can control whether the logical channel of the radio bearer is used for data transmission through the indication information, and the terminal side device can also modify the state of whether the logical channel is used for data transmission in the aforementioned method.
  • the terminal-side device can select and deactivate the logical channel indicated by the network-side device for data transmission by using any of the methods shown in Figs. 4-10, or it can activate one of the logical channels indicated by the network-side device for data transmission.
  • the external logical channel that is, the network side device and the terminal side device can independently determine the logical channel used for data transmission, so that the flexibility of the data transmission process can be increased.
  • the specific implementation process is similar to the foregoing embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device adjusts the logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, so as to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization. From the description in the foregoing embodiment, it can be seen that the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is represented by the channel quality of the cell associated with the logical channel. That is to say, adjusting the logical channel used for data transmission is essentially It is adjusting the cell used for data transmission.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • the terminal side device adjusts the mapping relationship between the cell and the logical channel to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization.
  • the network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
  • the network side device sends the second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
  • Steps S1101 to S1102 are similar to steps S401 to S402, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network side device configures two logical channels for the radio bearer X of the terminal side device, namely LCH1 and LCH2, and the cell configured by the network side device for LCH1 is CC1 to CC3, and the cell configured for LCH2 is CC4 ⁇ CC6.
  • step S1102 is an optional step, that is, it is not necessary to be performed, that is, the network side device may not configure a corresponding cell for the logical channel of the radio bearer.
  • the dotted line indicates that this step is optional.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the channel quality of each of the at least two cells.
  • step S1103 The corresponding content in step S1103 is similar to that in step S403, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device determines a first mapping relationship between the at least two logical channels and the at least two cells according to the channel quality of each of the at least two cells.
  • the first mapping relationship includes: the at least two cells are arranged in ascending or descending order of channel quality, and the arranged at least two cells are mapped to the at least two logical channels according to a preset rule.
  • the preset rule may be a rule that makes the cells corresponding to each logical channel include the first type of cell and/or the second type of cell, and the first type of cell is located in the first half of the at least two sorted cells. Cells (when sorting in descending order, the cells in the first half are the cells with better channel quality), and the second type of cells is the cells in the latter half of the at least two sorted cells (when sorting in descending order, the latter Half of the cells are the cells with poor channel quality).
  • the preset rule is not restricted. Wherein, when the number of at least two cells is an odd number, the middle cell after the arrangement may belong to the first half of the cells or the second half of the cells.
  • the network side device configures 6 cells (CC1 to CC6) for the 2 logical channels (LCH1 and LCH2) of the terminal side device, and the RSRP of the cell measured by the terminal side device is used as the channel quality of the cell as an example.
  • the terminal-side device obtains the RSRP of the 6 cells, the 6 cells are arranged in descending order of RSRP, and the sequence of the cells obtained after sorting is CC1, CC3, CC2, CC4, CC6, and CC5, as shown in FIG. 12A. Then, the terminal-side device allocates the sorted cells to the two logical channels according to the preset allocation rule.
  • the preset allocation rule may be to allocate the sorted cells to the logical channels in sequence according to the sorted cell order, and only one cell can be allocated to one logical channel in one allocation process. Then, the terminal-side device allocates CC1 to LCH1, then CC3 to LCH2, CC2 to LCH1, CC4 to LCH2, CC6 to LCH1, and CC5 to LCH2, thereby obtaining the first mapping relationship: LCH1 is associated with CC1, CC2, and CC6, and LCH2 is associated with CC3, CC4, and CC5.
  • the network side device configures 8 cells (CC1 to CC8) for the 2 logical channels (LCH1 and LCH2) of the terminal side device. Take the RSRP of the cell measured by the terminal side device as the channel quality of the cell as an example.
  • the terminal-side equipment obtains the RSRP of 8 cells, it will arrange the 8 cells in ascending order of RSRP, and the sorted cell order is CC5, CC6, CC4, CC7, CC8, CC2, CC3, and CC1, as shown in Figure 12B Show. Then, the terminal-side device allocates the sorted cells to the two logical channels according to the preset allocation rule.
  • the preset allocation rule may be that the ranked cells are allocated to logical channels in sequence according to the sequence of the ranked cells, and two cells are allocated to one logical channel in one allocation process. Then, the terminal-side device allocates CC5 and CC6 to LCH1, then allocates CC4 and CC7 to LCH2, CC8 and CC2 to LCH1, and CC3 and CC1 to LCH2, thereby obtaining the first mapping relationship: LCH1 and CC5, CC6, CC8, and CC2 are associated, and LCH2 is associated with CC4, CC7, CC3, and CC1.
  • the terminal side device sends a first instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the first instruction.
  • the first indication is used to indicate the first mapping relationship.
  • the terminal side device determines the first mapping relationship, it can report to the network side device. If the network side device configures an associated cell for each logical channel, the network side device may modify the associated cell of the logical channel according to the first indication.
  • the first instruction may be MAC CE signaling, or RLC control protocol data unit (control protocol data unit, control PDU), or PDCP control PDU, or RRC signaling, which is not limited here.
  • the network side device pre-configures the mapping relationship between logical channels and cells, it can avoid that the channel quality of the cell associated with a certain logical channel is always preferred, while the channel quality of the cell associated with other logical channels is always deviated, thus Causes the problem of low reliability of data transmission.
  • the repeated transmission process is performed between the terminal side device and the network side device. In actual use, repeated transmissions can also be performed between different terminal side devices.
  • different terminal-side devices may perform repeated transmission through a sidelink (SL) interface, where the sidelink interface is an interface for direct communication between two terminal-side devices.
  • SL sidelink
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack for duplication between different terminal side devices.
  • a transmitter (transmitter, Tx) UE and a receiver (receiver, Rx) UE are included.
  • SLRB sidelink radio bearer
  • the data packet is first copied at the PDCP layer, and then delivered to multiple SL RLC entities, and passed the corresponding
  • the SL LCH is transmitted, and there is a mapping relationship between the SL LCH and the side link carrier (SL carrier), which is similar to the foregoing mapping relationship between the logical channel and the cell, where the mapping relationship between the SL LCH and the SL carrier is determined by UE is determined.
  • SL carrier side link carrier
  • one SLRB can be configured with more legs for repeated transmission. As shown in FIG. 13B, one SLRB is configured with four legs for repeated transmission.
  • FIGS. 4 to 12B are also applicable to repeated transmissions between terminal-side devices.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application. The description of the flowchart is as follows:
  • the network side device sends a first configuration signaling to the terminal side device 1, and the terminal side device 1 receives the first configuration signaling.
  • the first configuration signaling is used to indicate the configuration repeat transmission function of the SLRB between the terminal side device 1 and the terminal side device 2.
  • the content included in the first configuration signaling is similar to that in step S401, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network side device sends second configuration signaling to the terminal side device 1, and the terminal side device 1 receives the second configuration signaling.
  • the second configuration signaling is used to indicate a cell set or SL carrier or SL bandwidth part (BWP) or SL resource pool set associated with each SL LCH configuration of the SLRB.
  • the SL resource pool refers to a collection of resources that are continuous or discontinuous in the time domain and continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain on the sidelink carrier.
  • the content indicated by the second configuration signaling can also be determined by the terminal-side device. In FIG. 14, the configuration by the network-side device is taken as an example.
  • the terminal-side device 1 obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH in the at least two SL LCHs.
  • the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH is represented by the channel quality of the SL carrier associated with the SL LCH.
  • the channel quality of the SL carrier can be RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI, or it can be a parameter reflecting the degree of congestion of the SL channel, for example, it can be the channel busy ratio (CBR) of the SL carrier, where the value of this parameter The larger the value, the worse the channel quality of the SL carrier.
  • CBR channel busy ratio
  • the specific acquisition method is similar to step S403, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device 1 receives the first instruction.
  • the first indication is used to indicate at least one transmission quality threshold, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine an SL LCH for repeated transmission.
  • the transmission quality threshold can be understood as the aforementioned RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI/CBR and other thresholds.
  • the method for setting the at least one transmission quality threshold is similar to that in step S404, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device 1 determines an SL LCH for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH.
  • the terminal side device 1 sends a second instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the second instruction.
  • the second indication is used to indicate whether each SL LCH of the at least two SL LCHs of the SLRB is used for data transmission.
  • Step S1405 to step S1407 are similar to step S405 to step S407 and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal-side device can determine the SL LCH for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH. In this way, when the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH is better, the terminal-side device can only Part of the SL LCH is selected for repeated transmission, thereby avoiding resource waste. Moreover, when the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH is poor, the terminal-side device can use all the SL LCHs for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission quality, so that the transmission quality and resource utilization can be improved in the SL repeated transmission scenario. balanced.
  • the network-side device or the terminal-side device may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules that perform each function.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • FIG. 15 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of a device involved in an embodiment of the present application, and the device 1500 may exist in the form of software.
  • the apparatus 1500 may include: a processing unit 1502 and a communication unit 1503.
  • the processing unit 1502 is used to control and manage the actions of the device 1500.
  • the communication unit 1503 is used to support communication between the device 1500 and other network entities.
  • the communication unit 1503 is also called a transceiving unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, which are used to perform receiving and sending operations, respectively.
  • the apparatus 1500 may further include a storage unit 1501 for storing program codes and/or data of the apparatus 1500.
  • the processing unit 1502 may be a processor or a controller, which may implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication unit 1503 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, or a transceiving circuit, etc., where the communication interface is a general term. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may include multiple interfaces.
  • the storage unit 1501 may be a memory.
  • the apparatus 1500 may be the terminal-side device in any of the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip provided in the terminal-side device.
  • the processing unit 1502 can support the apparatus 1500 to perform the actions of the terminal-side device in the above method examples.
  • the processing unit 1502 mainly executes the internal actions of the terminal side device in the method example, and the communication unit 1503 may support communication between the apparatus 1500 and the network side device.
  • the communication unit 1503 may be used to perform steps S401 to S403, step S405, and step S407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, or to perform steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. Steps S701 to S704, S706, and S708, or used to perform steps S901 to S904, step S906, and step S908 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, or used to perform the steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 Steps S1101 to S1102 and S1105, or used to perform steps S1401 to S1402, step S1404, and step S1406 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 14, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 1502 may be used to perform step S404, step S406, and step S408 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, or used to perform step S705, step S707, and step S709 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, or for Perform step S905, step S907, and step S909 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, or used to perform step S1103 to step S1104 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, or used to perform step S1103 to step S1104 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Steps S1403, S1405, and S1407, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
  • modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • the functional modules in the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing module, or each module may exist alone physically, or two or more modules may be integrated into one module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules.
  • the integrated module is implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • a computer readable storage medium includes several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium may be various mediums capable of storing program codes, such as a memory.
  • the communication apparatus 1600 may be a terminal-side device, which can realize the function of the terminal-side device in the method provided in the embodiment of this application; the communication apparatus 1600 may also be A device that supports the terminal-side device to implement the function of the terminal-side device in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1600 may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the aforementioned communication unit 1503 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver is integrated in the communication device 1600 to form a communication interface 1610.
  • the communication apparatus 1600 includes at least one processor 1620, which is configured to implement or support the communication apparatus 1600 to implement the function of the terminal-side device in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 1620 may determine the logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, which is not repeated here.
  • the communication device 1600 may further include at least one memory 1630 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1630 and the processor 1620 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1620 may cooperate with the memory 1630 to operate.
  • the processor 1620 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1630. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the communication apparatus 1600 may further include a communication interface 1610 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1600 can communicate with other devices.
  • the other device may be a network side device.
  • the processor 1620 can use the communication interface 1610 to send and receive data.
  • the communication interface 1610 may specifically be a transceiver.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection medium between the communication interface 1610, the processor 1620, and the memory 1630.
  • the memory 1630, the processor 1620, and the communication interface 1610 are connected by a bus 1640 in FIG. 16, and the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 16.
  • the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 16, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1620 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component. Or execute the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 1630 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), For example, random-access memory (RAM).
  • the memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a communication device, which may be a terminal or a circuit.
  • the communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal-side device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 17 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 17. In actual terminal equipment products, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver unit of the terminal device, and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1710 and a processing unit 1720.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1710 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1710 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1710 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiving unit 1710 is configured to perform sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment
  • processing unit 1720 is configured to perform other operations on the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment except for the transceiving operation.
  • the transceiving unit 1710 is configured to perform step S401 to step S403, step S405, and step S407 in the transceiving operation of the terminal side device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or the transceiving unit 1710 also It is used to perform other receiving and sending steps of the terminal-side device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to execute step S404, step S406, and step S408 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or the processing unit 1720 is further configured to execute other processing steps of the terminal-side device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip When the communication device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is a processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the device shown in FIG. 18 can be referred to.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processor 1620 in FIG. 16.
  • the device includes a processor 1810, a data sending processor 1820, and a data receiving processor 1830.
  • the processing unit 1502 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1810 in FIG. 18, and completes corresponding functions.
  • the communication unit 1503 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1820 and/or the receiving data processor 1830 in FIG. 18.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 18, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
  • the processing device 1900 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment can be used as a modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1903 and an interface 1904.
  • the processor 1903 completes the functions of the aforementioned processing unit 1502, and the interface 1904 completes the aforementioned functions of the communication unit 1503.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1906, a processor 1903, and a program stored in the memory 1906 and running on the processor.
  • the processor 1903 executes the program to implement the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. Methods.
  • the memory 1906 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1900, as long as the memory 1906 can be connected to the The processor 1903 is fine.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the terminal in any one of the embodiments of FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 9 or FIG. 11 or FIG. The method executed by the side device.
  • the embodiments of this application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the terminal-side device in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 9 or FIG. 11 or FIG. Method of execution.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory for implementing the functions of the terminal-side device in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a system, which includes the aforementioned terminal side device and network side device.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc., integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, hard disk, Magnetic tape), optical media (for example, digital video disc (DVD for short)), or semiconductor media (for example, SSD).

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are a data transmission method and a communication apparatus. In the method, logical channels for data transmission are determined by a terminal-side device according to the uplink data transmission quality of each of the logical channels. Thus, when the uplink data transmission quality of each of the logical channels is good, the terminal-side device can select some of the logical channels for duplication transmission, thus, at an air interface side, duplication transmission of the same data packet only needs to be performed a few times, such that the wasting of resources can be avoided; and when the uplink data transmission quality of each of the logical channels is poor, the terminal-side device can use all the logical channels for duplication transmission to guarantee transmission quality, such that a balance between the transmission quality and a resource utilization rate can be realized.

Description

一种数据传输方法及通信装置Data transmission method and communication device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross references to related applications
本申请要求在2019年07月08日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910611902.1、申请名称为“一种数据传输方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201910611902.1, and the application name is "a data transmission method and communication device" on July 08, 2019. The entire content is incorporated into this application by reference. in.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种数据传输方法及通信装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a data transmission method and communication device.
背景技术Background technique
为了支持超高可靠低时延通信(ultra reliability and low latency communication,URLLC)业务,在第五代移动通信技术(the 5 th generation,5G)***中引入了分组数据聚合协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的重复(duplication)传输的功能。所述PDCP层的重复传输是:将无线承载的同一PDCP数据包复制成至少两个相同的数据包(也就是重复包),然后这至少两个相同的数据包分别递交给至少两个无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)实体进行传输。所述至少两个相同的数据包通过与每个RLC实体一一对应的逻辑信道(logical channel,LCH)再被传输到媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层。传输到MAC层的所述至少两个相同数据包可以被封装在不同的MAC协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)中,进而在与每个LCH对应的小区上进行传输。 In order to support ultra-high reliability and low-latency communication (ultra reliability and low latency communication, URLLC) service, the introduction of packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol fifth generation mobile communication technology (the 5 th generation, 5G) system, The function of duplication transmission of the PDCP) layer. The repeated transmission of the PDCP layer is: copy the same PDCP data packet carried by the radio into at least two identical data packets (that is, repeated packets), and then deliver the at least two identical data packets to at least two wireless links respectively The radio link control (RLC) entity performs transmission. The at least two identical data packets are transmitted to the media access control (media access control, MAC) layer through a logical channel (logical channel, LCH) corresponding to each RLC entity one-to-one. The at least two identical data packets transmitted to the MAC layer may be encapsulated in different MAC protocol data units (protocol data unit, PDU), and then transmitted on the cell corresponding to each LCH.
目前,为了使得duplication传输能够具有较好的传输质量,基站可以为一个无线承载配置大于2个LCH用于duplication传输。然而,当用于duplication传输的LCH较多时,可能会存在资源浪费的问题。例如,基站为终端设备的某一个无线承载配置4个LCH进行duplication传输时,终端设备将这个无线承载的同一PDCP数据包复制为4个相同的数据包,然后分别通过这个4个LCH在空口传输给所述基站。然而,当这4个LCH的数据传输质量都较好时,可能只需要使用其中的2个LCH进行重复传输即可保证数据包的传输可靠性,但实际上却进行了4个LCH进行重复传输,从而,造成了资源浪费。At present, in order to enable duplication transmission to have better transmission quality, a base station can configure more than 2 LCHs for duplication transmission for a radio bearer. However, when there are many LCHs used for duplication transmission, there may be a waste of resources. For example, when the base station configures 4 LCHs for a certain radio bearer of a terminal device for duplication transmission, the terminal device copies the same PDCP data packet of this radio bearer into 4 identical data packets, and then transmits them on the air interface through these 4 LCHs. To the base station. However, when the data transmission quality of these 4 LCHs is good, you may only need to use 2 LCHs for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission reliability of the data packet, but in fact, 4 LCHs are used for repeated transmission. , Thus, caused a waste of resources.
因此,如何均衡duplication功能中的传输质量和资源利用率是目前亟待解决的问题。Therefore, how to balance the transmission quality and resource utilization in the duplication function is a problem to be solved urgently.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种数据传输方法及通信装置,用以在为无线承载配置多个逻辑信道的情形下,实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。The present application provides a data transmission method and communication device, which are used to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization when multiple logical channels are configured for a radio bearer.
第一方面,提供一种数据传输方法,在该方法中,终端侧设备的无线承载配置有在至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能,当终端侧设备进行数据传输之前,终端侧设备首先获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,然后,根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,在用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1的情况下,则终端侧设备在该用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行该重复传输。In a first aspect, a data transmission method is provided. In this method, the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with the function of repeated transmission on at least two logical channels. Before the terminal-side device performs data transmission, the terminal-side device first obtains The uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel in at least two logical channels, and then the logical channel used for data transmission is determined according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. If the number of logical channels used for data transmission is greater than one In this case, the terminal-side device performs the repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission.
在上述技术方案中,由于用于数据传输的逻辑信道是由终端侧设备根据每个逻辑信道 的上行数据传输质量确定的,这样,当每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量较好时,则终端侧设备可以只选用其中的一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输,从而在空口侧一个数据包只进行少数几次重复传输,从而可以避免资源浪费。当每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量较差时,终端侧设备可以使用所有的逻辑信道进行重复传输,以保证传输质量,从而可以实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。In the above technical solution, the logical channel used for data transmission is determined by the terminal-side device according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. In this way, when the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is better, the terminal The side device can select only a part of the logical channels for repeated transmission, so that a data packet on the air interface side is only repeated a few times, thereby avoiding resource waste. When the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is poor, the terminal-side device can use all the logical channels for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission quality, thereby achieving a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization.
进一步,相较于由网络侧设备通过感知信道质量变化然后控制逻辑信道是否用于数据传输的方式,由于网络侧设备生成指示信息,指示数据传输以及重传,以及终端侧处理该指示信息均需要一定的时长,而由终端侧设备来确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道可以节省前述过程所需的时长,因此,可以更快地响应信道条件的变化。Further, compared to the way that the network side device senses the channel quality change and then controls whether the logical channel is used for data transmission, the network side device generates instruction information, instructs data transmission and retransmission, and the terminal side processes the instruction information. For a certain period of time, the determination of the logical channel for data transmission by the terminal-side device can save the time required for the foregoing process, and therefore, it can respond to changes in channel conditions more quickly.
在一种可能的设计中,每个逻辑信道分别与不同的小区组关联,针对该至少两个逻辑信道中的任意一个逻辑信道,可以称为第一逻辑信道,该第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量为该第一逻辑信道对应的小区组的信道质量。In a possible design, each logical channel is associated with a different cell group. For any one of the at least two logical channels, it can be called a first logical channel. The uplink data of the first logical channel The transmission quality is the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
在上述技术方案中,由于每个逻辑信道中传输的数据是通过与该逻辑信道对应的小区发送的,因此,可以通过与每个逻辑信道对应的小区组的信道质量来表明每个逻辑信道的数据传输质量,实现方式简单且有效。In the above technical solution, since the data transmitted in each logical channel is sent through the cell corresponding to the logical channel, the channel quality of each logical channel can be indicated by the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to each logical channel. The quality of data transmission is simple and effective.
在一种可能的设计中,终端侧设备可以使用不同类型的参考信号测量与该至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量,这样,终端侧设备可以根据实际情况选择用于测量的参考信号,增加方案的灵活性。In a possible design, the terminal-side device can use different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels, so that the terminal-side device can select the reference for measurement according to the actual situation. Signal, increase the flexibility of the program.
其中,当该终端侧设备使用不同类型的参考信号测量与该至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量时,例如,参考信号的类型可以分为第一类型和第二类型,则终端侧设备可以使用其中一种类型的参考信号(例如第二类型的参考信号)作为基准,从而当终端侧设备使用除基准参考信号之外的参考信号(例如第一类型的参考信号)进行测量时,终端侧设备则确定使用第一类型的参考信号进行测量的小区的信道质量为该终端侧设备在该小区获取的测量结果与预设偏移量的和值,该第一类型的参考信号为该不同类型的参考信号中的其中一种类型的参考信号。Wherein, when the terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels, for example, the types of reference signals can be divided into the first type and the second type, then the terminal The side device can use one of the types of reference signals (such as the second type of reference signal) as a reference, so when the terminal side device uses a reference signal other than the reference signal (such as the first type of reference signal) for measurement , The terminal-side device determines that the channel quality of the cell measured using the first-type reference signal is the sum of the measurement result obtained by the terminal-side device in the cell and the preset offset, and the first-type reference signal is One of the different types of reference signals.
在一种可能的设计中,该终端侧设备还可以接收网络侧设备发送的用于指示至少一个传输质量门限的第一指示,该至少一个传输质量门限用于该终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。当终端侧设备接收该第一指示,则终端侧设备可以确定由终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,也就是说,该第一指示隐式指示终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。In a possible design, the terminal-side device may also receive a first indication sent by the network-side device for indicating at least one transmission quality threshold, where the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine that it is used for data transmission Logical channel. When the terminal-side device receives the first instruction, the terminal-side device can determine that the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission, that is, the first instruction implicitly instructs the terminal-side device to determine the logical channel used for data transmission channel.
在一种可能的设计中,该至少一个传输质量门限可以包括但不限于如下四种情况:In a possible design, the at least one transmission quality threshold may include but is not limited to the following four situations:
第一种情况:该至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,该至少一个传输质量门限包括N个第一传输质量门限和M*N个第二传输质量门限,该N个第一传输质量门限与该主逻辑信道关联,该M*N个第二传输质量门限与该至少一个辅逻辑信道关联,M、N为大于或等于1的整数。The first case: the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, the at least one transmission quality threshold includes N first transmission quality thresholds and M*N second transmission quality thresholds, and The N first transmission quality thresholds are associated with the primary logical channel, the M*N second transmission quality thresholds are associated with the at least one secondary logical channel, and M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1.
第二种情况:该至少两个逻辑信道的数量为K个,该至少一个传输质量门限分为K组,每组传输质量门限中包括至少一个传输质量门限,该K个逻辑信道与该K组传输质量门限一一对应,K为大于或等于2的整数。The second case: the number of the at least two logical channels is K, the at least one transmission quality threshold is divided into K groups, and each group of transmission quality thresholds includes at least one transmission quality threshold, and the K logical channels and the K groups The transmission quality threshold has a one-to-one correspondence, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
第一种情况和第二种情况的区别在于,至少两个逻辑信道中是否设置有主逻辑信道,相应地,该至少一个传输质量门限中是否设置有对主逻辑信道的一组传输质量门限。The difference between the first case and the second case is whether a primary logical channel is set in at least two logical channels, and correspondingly, whether a set of transmission quality thresholds for the primary logical channel is set in the at least one transmission quality threshold.
第三种情况:该至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,该至少一个传输质量门限与该主逻辑信道关联。也就是说,只针对主逻辑信道设置至少一个质量传输门限。The third case: the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is associated with the primary logical channel. In other words, at least one quality transmission threshold is set only for the main logical channel.
第四种情况:该至少一个传输质量门限分别与该至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道对应。也就是说,不论至少两个逻辑信道中是否设置有主逻辑信道,都会给每一个逻辑信道设置至少一个传输质量门限。The fourth case: the at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to each of the at least two logical channels. That is, regardless of whether the main logical channel is set in at least two logical channels, at least one transmission quality threshold is set for each logical channel.
在一种可能的设计中,该终端侧设备可以向网络侧设备发送用于指示该至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道是否用于数据传输的第二指示,该第二指示包括该无线承载的标识以及用于指示该至少两个逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的比特序列。In a possible design, the terminal-side device may send to the network-side device a second indication for indicating whether each of the at least two logical channels is used for data transmission, and the second indication includes the radio bearer And the bit sequence used to indicate the logical channel used for data transmission in the at least two logical channels.
当终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道后,可以将确定结果通知给网络侧设备,以网络侧设备获知终端侧设备在哪个或哪些逻辑信道上进行数据传输。After the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission, the determination result can be notified to the network-side device, and the network-side device can learn which logical channel or channels the terminal-side device performs data transmission on.
在一种可能的设计中,该终端侧设备首先接收网络侧设备发送的第三指示,该第三指示用于指示该终端侧设备至少使用该至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输,然后,终端侧设备获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,并根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道,该至少两个逻辑信道包括该第一部分逻辑信道和该第二部分逻辑信道,从而终端侧设备使用该第一部分逻辑信道和该第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道进行重复传输。In a possible design, the terminal-side device first receives a third instruction sent by the network-side device, and the third instruction is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at least the first part of the at least two logical channels for repetition Then, the terminal side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each of the at least two logical channels, and determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel The at least two logical channels include the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel, so that the terminal side device uses the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel for data transmission for repeated transmission.
在上述技术方案中,网络侧设备可以通过第三指示向终端侧设备指示一部分用于数据传输的逻辑信道,终端侧设备可以根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定另一部分逻辑信道中是否有用于数据传输的逻辑信道,这样,当网络侧设备指示的用于数据传输的逻辑信道的质量均较差时,终端侧设备可以增加用于数据传输的逻辑信道,可以改善数据传输质量。In the above technical solution, the network side device can indicate a part of the logical channel used for data transmission to the terminal side device through the third instruction, and the terminal side device can determine whether another part of the logical channel is useful according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. In this way, when the quality of the logical channel for data transmission indicated by the network side device is poor, the terminal side device can increase the logical channel for data transmission, which can improve the data transmission quality.
在一种可能的设计中,该终端侧设备首先接收网络侧设备发送的第四指示,该第四指示用于指示该终端侧设备至多使用该至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输然后,终端侧设备获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,并根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定该第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道,从而在该第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1时,终端侧设备在该第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行重复传输。In a possible design, the terminal-side device first receives a fourth instruction sent by the network-side device, and the fourth instruction is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use the first part of the at least two logical channels for repetition. After transmission, the terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each of the at least two logical channels, and determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, Therefore, when the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first part of logical channels is greater than 1, the terminal side device performs repeated transmission on the logical channels used for data transmission in the first part of logical channels.
在上述技术方案中,网络侧设备可以通过第三指示向终端侧设备指示一部分用于数据传输的逻辑信道,终端侧设备只能根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定由网络侧设备指示的一部分逻辑信道中是否有用于数据传输的逻辑信道,例如,当网络侧设备指示的用于数据传输的逻辑信道的质量均较好时,则终端侧设备则可以确定只用其中一部分逻辑信道进行数据传输,可以减少资源浪费。In the above technical solution, the network side device can indicate a part of the logical channels used for data transmission to the terminal side device through the third instruction, and the terminal side device can only determine the data indicated by the network side device according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. Whether there are logical channels for data transmission in some logical channels. For example, when the quality of the logical channels for data transmission indicated by the network side device is good, the terminal side device can determine that only some of the logical channels are used for data Transmission can reduce waste of resources.
第二方面,提供一种数据传输方法,在该方法中,终端侧设备的无线承载配置有在至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能,则当终端侧设备进行数据传输之前,终端侧设备根据至少两个小区中每个小区的信道质量,确定至少两个逻辑信道与该至少两个小区的第一映射关系,从而该至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道分别通过在该第一映射关系中所映射的小区进行数据传输,然后,向网络侧设备发送用于指示该第一映射关系的第一指示。In a second aspect, a data transmission method is provided. In this method, the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with the function of repeating transmission on at least two logical channels. Before the terminal-side device performs data transmission, the terminal-side device The channel quality of each of the at least two cells, the first mapping relationship between the at least two logical channels and the at least two cells is determined, so that each of the at least two logical channels passes through the first mapping The cells mapped in the relationship perform data transmission, and then send a first indication for indicating the first mapping relationship to the network side device.
在上述技术方案中,通过终端侧设备修改逻辑信道与小区的映射关系的方式,可以实 现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。且,相较于由网络侧设备预先配置逻辑信道与小区的映射关系的方式,可以避免某一个逻辑信道关联的小区的信道质量一直偏好,而其他逻辑信道关联的小区的信道质量一直偏差,从而导致的数据传输的可靠性低的问题。In the above technical solution, by modifying the mapping relationship between the logical channel and the cell by the terminal-side device, the balance of transmission quality and resource utilization can be achieved. Moreover, compared to the way that the network side device pre-configures the mapping relationship between logical channels and cells, it can avoid that the channel quality of the cell associated with a certain logical channel is always preferred, while the channel quality of the cell associated with other logical channels is always deviated, thus Causes the problem of low reliability of data transmission.
在一种可能的设计中,该第一映射关系包括:该至少两个小区按照信道质量升序或降序排列,以及,将排列后的至少两个小区按照以预设规则与该至少两个逻辑信道映射。该预设规则为与每个逻辑信道对应的小区中包括第一类小区和/或第二类小区,该第一类小区为位于排列后的至少两个小区中的前半部分的小区,该第二类小区为位于排列后的至少两个小区中的后半部分的小区。In a possible design, the first mapping relationship includes: arranging the at least two cells in ascending or descending order of channel quality, and combining the at least two cells after the arrangement with the at least two logical channels according to a preset rule Mapping. The preset rule is that the cells corresponding to each logical channel include the first type cell and/or the second type cell, the first type cell is a cell located in the first half of the at least two cells after the arrangement, and the second type cell The second-class cells are cells located in the second half of the at least two cells after the arrangement.
第三方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面中终端侧设备所执行的方法。该通信装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储程序指令和数据。该存储器与该处理器耦合,该处理器可以调用并执行该存储器中存储的程序指令,用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面中终端侧设备所执行的任意一种方法。该通信装置还可以包括收发器,该收发器用于该通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备为网络侧设备。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device includes a processor for implementing the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect. The communication device may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data. The memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor can call and execute the program instructions stored in the memory to implement any method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect. The communication device may also include a transceiver, and the transceiver is used for the communication device to communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the other device is a network side device.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括:通信单元,用于获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,所述通信装置的无线承载配置有在所述至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能;处理单元,用于根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,以及,在所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1的情况下,所述处理单元使用所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道上通过所述通信单元进行该重复传输。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a communication unit configured to obtain the uplink data transmission quality of each of at least two logical channels, and the radio bearer of the communication device is configured to The function of repeated transmission on at least two logical channels; a processing unit for determining a logical channel for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, and, on the logical channel for data transmission When the number is greater than 1, the processing unit uses the logical channel for data transmission to perform the repeated transmission through the communication unit.
此外,第四方面所提供的通信装置可用于执行第一方面或第二方面中终端侧设备对应的方法,第四方面所提供的通信装置中未详尽描述的实现方式可参见前述实施例,此处不再赘述。In addition, the communication device provided in the fourth aspect can be used to execute the method corresponding to the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect. For the implementation modes not described in detail in the communication device provided in the fourth aspect, refer to the foregoing embodiments. I won't repeat it here.
第五方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面或第二方面中终端侧设备执行的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
第六方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面或第二方面中终端侧设备执行的方法。In a sixth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片***,该芯片***包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现第一方面或第二方面中终端侧设备执行的方法。该芯片***可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory, configured to implement the method executed by the terminal-side device in the first aspect or the second aspect. The chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
上述第二方面至第七方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对第一方面或第二方面的方法及其实现方式的有益效果的描述。For the beneficial effects of the foregoing second to seventh aspects and implementations thereof, reference may be made to the description of the beneficial effects of the method of the first aspect or the second aspect and implementations thereof.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例适用的无线通信***架构图;FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of a wireless communication system applicable to an embodiment of this application;
图2A为CA场景下实现PDCP层的重复传输功能涉及的网络架构;Figure 2A shows the network architecture involved in implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in the CA scenario;
图2B为DC场景下实现PDCP层的重复传输功能所涉及的网络架构;Figure 2B shows the network architecture involved in implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in the DC scenario;
图3A为网络侧设备给一个无线承载配置3条腿的一种网络架构的示意图;Figure 3A is a schematic diagram of a network architecture in which a network side device configures three legs for a radio bearer;
图3B为网络侧设备给一个无线承载配置3条腿的一种网络架构的示意图;3B is a schematic diagram of a network architecture in which a network side device configures three legs for a radio bearer;
图4为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的一种示例的流程图;4 is a flowchart of an example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例中网络侧设备为逻辑信道配置关联的小区组的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a network side device configuring an associated cell group for a logical channel in an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例中第二指示的一种示例的示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a second indication in an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图8为本申请实施例终端侧设备从网络侧设备指示的至少两个逻辑信道中确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道的示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of a terminal side device determining a logical channel for data transmission from at least two logical channels indicated by the network side device according to an embodiment of the application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图10为本申请实施例中终端侧设备确定网络侧设备指示的至少两个逻辑信道之外的信道中确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道的示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a terminal side device determining a logical channel for data transmission among channels other than at least two logical channels indicated by the network side device in an embodiment of the application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图;FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图12A为本申请实施例中对逻辑信道对应的小区按照RSRP降序排列得到的排序后的小区的示意图;12A is a schematic diagram of sorted cells obtained by arranging cells corresponding to logical channels in descending order of RSRP in an embodiment of the application;
图12B为本申请实施例中对逻辑信道对应的小区按照RSRP升序排列得到的排序后的小区的示意图;12B is a schematic diagram of sorted cells obtained by arranging cells corresponding to logical channels in ascending order of RSRP in an embodiment of the application;
图13A~图13B为不同的终端侧设备之间进行duplication的协议栈示意图;13A to 13B are schematic diagrams of protocol stacks for duplication between different terminal side devices;
图14为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图;FIG. 14 is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图15为本申请实施例中提供的通信装置的一种示例的结构框图;15 is a structural block diagram of an example of a communication device provided in an embodiment of this application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一种示例的结构框图;16 is a structural block diagram of another example of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图;FIG. 17 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图;FIG. 18 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图。FIG. 19 is another schematic block diagram of the communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the objectives, technical solutions, and advantages of the embodiments of the present application clearer, the embodiments of the present application will be further described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。Hereinafter, some terms in the embodiments of the present application will be explained to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art.
1)终端侧设备(terminal equipment),又称之为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等,是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的独立的设备,例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。也可以是具有上述设备的功能的芯片***,在本申请实施例中不对终端侧设备的具体形式进行限制。1) Terminal equipment (terminal equipment), also known as terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), etc., is a kind of An independent device with voice and/or data connectivity, for example, may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem. It may also be a chip system with the functions of the above-mentioned device, and the specific form of the terminal-side device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
该终端侧设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端可以包括用户设备(user equipment,UE)、无线终端、移动终端、订户单元(subscriber unit)、用户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,智能穿戴式设备等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。The terminal-side device may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN. The terminal may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal, mobile terminal, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc. For example, it may include mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers with mobile terminals, portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built or vehicle-mounted mobile devices, and smart wearable devices. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, etc.) PDA), and other equipment.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,智能穿戴式设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。智能穿戴式设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。智能穿戴式设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义智能穿戴式设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in the embodiments of this application, smart wearable devices are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait. A smart wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Smart wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly speaking, smart wearable devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be realized without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as various smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
或者,终端侧设备还可以包括受限设备,例如功耗受限的设备,或存储能力受限的设备,或计算能力受限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位***(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。Alternatively, the terminal-side device may also include restricted devices, such as devices with limited power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
或者,该终端侧设备还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(driverless)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。Alternatively, the terminal-side device may also be a virtual reality (VR) device, an augmented reality (AR) device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, or a wireless terminal in driverless. , Wireless terminal in remote medical surgery, wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, smart home (smart) Home) wireless terminals, etc.
2)网络侧设备,可以是(无线)接入网((radio)access network,(R)AN)设备。其中,(R)AN设备,例如包括基站(例如,接入点),可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端通信的设备。(无线)接入网设备可用于将收到的空中帧与网际协议(IP)分组进行相互转换,作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器,其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。(无线)接入网设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如,(无线)接入网设备可以包括无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)接入点(access point,AP)等。2) The network side device can be a (radio) access network ((radio) access network, (R) AN) device. Wherein, the (R)AN device, for example, includes a base station (for example, an access point), and may refer to a device that communicates with a wireless terminal through one or more cells through an air interface in an access network. The (wireless) access network equipment can be used to convert the received air frames and Internet Protocol (IP) packets to each other, as a router between the terminal equipment and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include IP network. The (wireless) access network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface. For example, (wireless) access network equipment may include radio network controller (RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station) , BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) access point (access point, AP) etc.
(无线)接入网设备也可以包括长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)***或演进的LTE***(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B)。或者,(无线)接入网设备也可以包括5G***或新无线(new radio,NR)***中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)、收发点(transmission and reception point,TRP),或传输点(transmission point,TP)。或者,(无线)接入网设备可以也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network,CloudRAN)***中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和/或分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),或者,也可以是统一接入回传(integrated access backhaul,IAB)***中的节点,或者,车辆网***中的路边装置(road site unit,RSU)。本申请实施例并不限定。The (wireless) access network equipment may also include the evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node) in the long term evolution (LTE) system or the evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A). B). Alternatively, the (wireless) access network equipment may also include the next generation node B (gNB) and the transmission and reception point (TRP) in the 5G system or the new radio (NR) system, Or transmission point (TP). Alternatively, the (wireless) access network equipment may also include a centralized unit (CU) and/or a distributed unit (DU) in a cloud radio access network (CloudRAN) system, Or, it may also be a node in an integrated access backhaul (IAB) system, or a road site unit (RSU) in a vehicle network system. The embodiments of the present application are not limited.
在本申请实施例中,技术术语“(无线)接入网设备”和“接入网设备”、“终端侧设备”和“终端设备”、“网络侧设备”和“网络设备”可以互换使用。In the embodiments of this application, the technical terms "(wireless) access network equipment" and "access network equipment", "terminal side equipment" and "terminal equipment", "network side equipment" and "network equipment" are interchangeable. use.
3)双连接(dual connectivity,DC),也称跨基站载波聚合,就是终端设备同时连接两个接入网设备(例如基站)。终端设备连接的两个接入网设备可以是同一无线接入技术下的接入网设备,例如都是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)通信***中的基站或都是5G通信***中的基站,或者终端设备连接的两个接入网设备也可以是不同的无线接入技术下 的基站,例如一个是LTE通信***中的基站,另一个是5G通信***中的基站。3) Dual connectivity (DC), also known as cross-base station carrier aggregation, means that a terminal device is connected to two access network devices (such as a base station) at the same time. The two access network devices connected by the terminal device can be access network devices under the same wireless access technology, for example, both are base stations in a long term evolution (LTE) communication system or both are base stations in a 5G communication system , Or the two access network devices connected by the terminal device may also be base stations under different wireless access technologies, for example, one is a base station in an LTE communication system, and the other is a base station in a 5G communication system.
4)本申请中载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA),特指基站内载波聚合。CA技术可以将多个成员载波(component carrier,CC)聚合在一起为一个终端设备提供服务,实现更大的传输带宽,有效提高了上下行传输速率。4) Carrier aggregation (CA) in this application specifically refers to carrier aggregation within a base station. The CA technology can aggregate multiple component carriers (CC) together to provide services for one terminal device, realize a larger transmission bandwidth, and effectively increase the uplink and downlink transmission rates.
5)无线承载,终端设备和网络设备之间通过建立至少一个无线承载(radio bearer,RB)来传输数据。无线承载可以分为主要用于传输信令的信令无线承载(signalling radio bearer,SRB)和主要用于传输业务数据的数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)。5) Radio bearer: The terminal device and the network device establish at least one radio bearer (RB) to transmit data. Radio bearers can be divided into a signaling radio bearer (SRB) mainly used to transmit signaling and a data radio bearer (DRB) mainly used to transmit service data.
6)逻辑信道与小区关联,也称为逻辑信道与载波关联,包括而不限定为,如果在逻辑信道的配置中指示了某些小区允许使用,则表示该逻辑信道中传输的数据可以在这些小区上传输,或者这些小区上的资源可以分配给该逻辑信道,此时可以称为逻辑信道与这些小区关联。或者,可以理解为,逻辑信道中传输的数据不在与该逻辑信道所关联的小区之外的小区上传输。在PDCP层的重复传输的功能中,每个逻辑信道可以与小区具有关联关系,或者,每个逻辑信道也可以不与小区具有关联关系。例如,在一些场景中,如果逻辑信道没有配置与小区的关联关系,则在该逻辑信道中传输的数据可以在任意小区上进行传输。6) The logical channel is associated with the cell, also known as the logical channel with the carrier, including but not limited to, if certain cells are allowed to be used in the configuration of the logical channel, it means that the data transmitted in the logical channel can be used in these Transmission on cells, or resources on these cells can be allocated to the logical channel, at this time, it can be called that the logical channel is associated with these cells. Or, it can be understood that the data transmitted in the logical channel is not transmitted in a cell other than the cell associated with the logical channel. In the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer, each logical channel may have an association relationship with a cell, or each logical channel may not have an association relationship with a cell. For example, in some scenarios, if the logical channel is not configured with an association relationship with a cell, the data transmitted in the logical channel can be transmitted on any cell.
例如,可以为逻辑信道配置一个参数,通过该参数的取值来指示不同的小区,表示在该逻辑信道中传输的数据只能在该参数指定的小区上进行传输。作为一种示例,可以通过参数A来指示为每个逻辑信道配置的小区,例如,为逻辑信道1配置了参数A,参数A指示小区1和2,那么就表明在该逻辑信道1中传输的数据只能在小区1和2上传输。这样,逻辑信道1和参数A指示的小区(小区1和小区2)就可以称为是具有关联关系,也可以说是绑定关系或者映射关系。For example, a parameter can be configured for the logical channel, and different cells can be indicated by the value of the parameter, which means that the data transmitted in the logical channel can only be transmitted on the cell specified by the parameter. As an example, parameter A can be used to indicate the cell configured for each logical channel. For example, if parameter A is configured for logical channel 1, and parameter A indicates cells 1 and 2, then it indicates that the cell is transmitted in logical channel 1. Data can only be transmitted on cells 1 and 2. In this way, the logical channel 1 and the cells indicated by the parameter A (cell 1 and cell 2) can be said to have an association relationship, or a binding relationship or a mapping relationship.
7)重复传输,通常指将无线承载的同一数据包在PDCP层复制成多个相同的包(也就是重复包),然后这两个数据包分别递交给多个不同的RLC实体进行传输,进而通过不同的逻辑信道传输到MAC层。其中,逻辑信道是RLC层到MAC层之间的通道。需要注意的是,通常所说的重传是指重新传输(retransmission),而本申请实施例中的重复传输(duplication transmission)并不是重新传输。重新传输是指同一个数据包发送失败后的再次发送,或者是同一个数据包的连续多次发送,而重复传输是将一个数据包复制两个数据包,分别放到两个逻辑信道上传输,这里的“重复”,也可以理解为“复制”。7) Repeated transmission, usually refers to copying the same data packet carried by the radio into multiple identical packets (that is, repeated packets) at the PDCP layer, and then these two data packets are submitted to multiple different RLC entities for transmission, and then It is transmitted to the MAC layer through different logical channels. Among them, the logical channel is the channel from the RLC layer to the MAC layer. It should be noted that, generally speaking, retransmission refers to retransmission, and the duplication transmission in the embodiment of the present application is not retransmission. Retransmission refers to sending the same data packet again after failure, or sending the same data packet multiple times in succession, and repeated transmission is to copy one data packet to two data packets and put them on two logical channels for transmission. , "Repetition" here can also be understood as "copy".
8)本申请实施例中“多个”是指两个或两个以上,鉴于此,本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“至少一个”,可理解为一个或多个,例如理解为一个、两个或更多个。例如,包括至少一个,是指包括一个、两个或更多个,而且不限制包括的是哪几个,例如,包括A、B和C中的至少一个,那么包括的可以是A、B、C、A和B、A和C、B和C、或A和B和C。8) In the embodiments of this application, "multiple" refers to two or more than two. In view of this, "multiple" can also be understood as "at least two" in the embodiments of this application. "At least one" can be understood as one or more, for example, one, two or more. For example, including at least one refers to including one, two or more, and does not limit which ones are included. For example, including at least one of A, B, and C, then the included can be A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C.
“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。"And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
另外,字符“/”,如无特殊说明,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。本申请实施例中的术语“***”和“网络”可被互换使用。In addition, the character "/", unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of this application can be used interchangeably.
除非有相反的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。Unless otherwise stated, the ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority, or importance of multiple objects.
如上介绍了本申请实施例涉及的一些概念,下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的技术特征。Some concepts related to the embodiments of the present application are introduced above, and the technical features related to the embodiments of the present application are introduced below.
请参考图1,为本申请实施例所涉及的无线通信***的一种示例的架构图。如图1所示,该无线通信***中包括发送端和接收端,发送端和接收端通过无线承载进行数据传输。针对一个无线承载,在发送端的PDCP层和接收端的PDCP层均对应一个PDCP实体,该PDCP实体与至少两个RLC实体相连,该至少两个RLC实体中的每个RLC实体分别通过一个LCH关联到至少一个MAC实体,这里说明的是,每个RLC实体会通过一个LCH关联到一个MAC实体,当MAC实体有多个时,不同的RLC实体可能会被关联到不同的MAC实体。Please refer to FIG. 1, which is a structural diagram of an example of a wireless communication system involved in an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 1, the wireless communication system includes a sending end and a receiving end, and the sending end and the receiving end perform data transmission through a wireless bearer. For a radio bearer, the PDCP layer at the transmitting end and the PDCP layer at the receiving end correspond to a PDCP entity. The PDCP entity is connected to at least two RLC entities. Each RLC entity of the at least two RLC entities is associated with each other through an LCH. At least one MAC entity. It is explained here that each RLC entity is associated with one MAC entity through one LCH. When there are multiple MAC entities, different RLC entities may be associated with different MAC entities.
例如,在图1中,发送端和接收端分别包括同一PDCP实体,以及与同一PDCP实体连接的第一RLC实体和第二RLC实体,其中,第一RLC实体对应第一LCH,第二RLC实体对应第二LCH。每个LCH与至少一个小区关联,或者,可以理解为每个LCH与一个小区组关联,例如,在图1中,第一LCH与小区a、小区b以及小区c关联,第二LCH与小区d、小区e和小区f关联,小区a、小区b以及小区c可以称为小区组1,小区d、小区e和小区f可以称为小区组2。在重复传输的情况下,发送端通过小区组1中的任意一个或多个小区,向接收端发送第一LCH的数据,以及,发送端通过小区组2中的任意一个或多个小区,向接收端发送第二LCH的数据,且在PDCP实体对数据包进行复制后,将复制数据包分别通过第一RLC实体和第二RLC实体传输。For example, in Figure 1, the sender and receiver respectively include the same PDCP entity, and a first RLC entity and a second RLC entity connected to the same PDCP entity, where the first RLC entity corresponds to the first LCH, and the second RLC entity Corresponds to the second LCH. Each LCH is associated with at least one cell, or it can be understood that each LCH is associated with a cell group. For example, in Figure 1, the first LCH is associated with cell a, cell b, and cell c, and the second LCH is associated with cell d. , Cell e and cell f are associated, cell a, cell b, and cell c can be called cell group 1, and cell d, cell e and cell f can be called cell group 2. In the case of repeated transmission, the sender sends the first LCH data to the receiver through any one or more cells in the cell group 1, and the sender sends data to the receiver through any one or more cells in the cell group 2. The receiving end sends the data of the second LCH, and after the PDCP entity copies the data packet, the copied data packet is transmitted through the first RLC entity and the second RLC entity respectively.
需要说明的是,该发送端可以是网络侧设备,则接收端为终端侧设备,或者,该发送端为终端侧设备,则接收端为网络侧设备。It should be noted that the sending end may be a network side device, and the receiving end is a terminal side device, or, if the sending end is a terminal side device, the receiving end is a network side device.
需要说明的是,在如图1所示的无线通信***的架构图中,尽管示出了发送端和接收端,但该架构可以并不限于包括发送端和接收端。例如,还可以包括中继设备或用于承载虚拟化网络功能的设备等,这些对于本领域普通技术人员而言是显而易见的,在此不一一详述。It should be noted that, in the architecture diagram of the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 1, although the sending end and the receiving end are shown, the architecture may not be limited to including the sending end and the receiving end. For example, it may also include a relay device or a device for carrying virtualized network functions, etc., which are obvious to a person of ordinary skill in the art, and will not be described in detail here.
下面,以CA场景和DC场景,分别对PDCP层的重复传输功能进行说明。In the following, the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer is described in the CA scenario and the DC scenario.
请参考图2A,为CA场景下实现PDCP层的重复传输功能的一种示例的网络架构图。在CA场景下,终端侧设备连接到一个网络侧设备,且网络侧设备和终端侧设备针对一个无线承载的网络架构相同,也就是,都包括一个PDCP实体、两个RLC实体(分别为RLC1和RLC2)和一个MAC实体,两个RLC实体分别通过不同的LCH关联到该MAC实体,例如,RLC1通过LCH1关联到MAC实体,RLC2通过LCH2关联到MAC实体。与PDCP实体关联的一个RLC实体和一个LCH可以被称为“一条腿”,例如,在图2A所示的场景下,网络侧设备为一个无线承载配置了两条腿,LCH1和RLC1为一条腿,LCH2和RLC2为另一条腿。其中,在下文中,技术术语“PDCP实体”与“PDCP层”、“RLC实体”与“RLC层”、“MAC实体”与“MAC层”可以互换使用。Please refer to FIG. 2A, which is a network architecture diagram of an example of implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in a CA scenario. In the CA scenario, the terminal-side device is connected to a network-side device, and the network-side device and the terminal-side device have the same network architecture for a radio bearer, that is, both include a PDCP entity and two RLC entities (respectively RLC1 and RLC2) and a MAC entity. Two RLC entities are respectively associated with the MAC entity through different LCHs. For example, RLC1 is associated with the MAC entity through LCH1, and RLC2 is associated with the MAC entity through LCH2. An RLC entity and an LCH associated with a PDCP entity can be called "a leg". For example, in the scenario shown in Figure 2A, the network side device configures two legs for a radio bearer, and LCH1 and RLC1 are one leg. , LCH2 and RLC2 are the other legs. Hereinafter, the technical terms "PDCP entity" and "PDCP layer", "RLC entity" and "RLC layer", and "MAC entity" and "MAC layer" can be used interchangeably.
在通信***中,为无线承载配置PDCP层的重复传输功能后,可以激活或去激活该无线承载配置的PDCP层的重复传输功能(或者称为,激活或去激活PDCP层的重复传输功能)。在CA场景中,假设网络侧设备为某个无线承载配置了PDCP层的重复传输功能且激活该PDCP层的重复传输功能,那么该无线承载的数据包在PDCP层经过复制后,会得到两个相同的数据包,并通过两条腿进行处理和传输,从而给递交给同一个MAC实体。当该无线承载的PDCP层的重复传输功能去激活后,则PDCP层不对该无线承载的数据包进行复制,只将该无线承载的数据包发送给两条腿中的其中一条腿进行处理和传输,例如,网络侧设备可以设置这两条腿中有一条腿为主腿,另一条腿为辅腿,当PDCP层的重复传 输功能去激活后,PDCP层会将数据包发送给主腿进行处理和传输。In the communication system, after configuring the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer for the radio bearer, the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer configured for the radio bearer can be activated or deactivated (also referred to as activating or deactivating the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer). In the CA scenario, assuming that the network-side device configures the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer for a certain radio bearer and activates the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer, then the data packets of the radio bearer will be duplicated at the PDCP layer and will get two The same data packet is processed and transmitted through two legs, so as to be delivered to the same MAC entity. When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer of the radio bearer is deactivated, the PDCP layer does not copy the data packet of the radio bearer, and only sends the data packet of the radio bearer to one of the two legs for processing and transmission For example, the network side device can set one of the two legs as the primary leg and the other as the secondary leg. When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer is deactivated, the PDCP layer will send the data packet to the primary leg for processing And transmission.
在CA场景中,网络侧设备可以为每一个LCH配置对应的小区,从而该LCH上的数据包只能通过为其配置的小区进行传输。例如,在图2A中,网络侧设备为LCH1配置了2个小区,分别为CC1和CC2,以及,为LCH2也配置了2个小区,分别为CC3和CC4。这样,当该无线承载的PDCP层的重复传输功能激活后,LCH1上的数据只能通过CC1和CC2上的资源进行传输,LCH2上的数据只能通过CC3和CC4上的资源进行传输。当该无线承载的PDCP层的重复传输功能去激活后,则PDCH层会将数据包发送给主腿(例如LCH1),此时,LCH1上的数据可以在该网络侧设备所有的小区上进行传输,即可以通过CC1~CC4中的任意一个或者多个小区进行传输。可以理解为,网络侧设备为每个LCH配置的关联小区限制,只在PDCP层的重复传输功能激活时才生效。In the CA scenario, the network side device can configure a corresponding cell for each LCH, so that data packets on the LCH can only be transmitted through the configured cell. For example, in FIG. 2A, the network side device configures two cells for LCH1, namely CC1 and CC2, and also configures two cells for LCH2, namely CC3 and CC4. In this way, when the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer of the radio bearer is activated, the data on LCH1 can only be transmitted through the resources on CC1 and CC2, and the data on LCH2 can only be transmitted through the resources on CC3 and CC4. When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer of the radio bearer is deactivated, the PDCH layer will send the data packet to the master leg (such as LCH1). At this time, the data on LCH1 can be transmitted on all the cells of the network side device , That is, it can be transmitted through any one or more cells among CC1 to CC4. It can be understood that the associated cell restriction configured by the network side device for each LCH takes effect only when the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer is activated.
参见图2B,为DC场景下实现PDCP层的重复传输功能的一种示例的网络架构图。Refer to FIG. 2B, which is a network architecture diagram of an example of implementing the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer in a DC scenario.
对于网络侧设备来讲,DC场景涉及到主网络侧设备和辅网络侧设备,则主网络侧设备针对该无线承载,包括一个PDCP实体、一个RLC实体和一个MAC实体,如图2B中的RLC1和MAC1。辅网络侧设备针对该无线承载,也包括一个RLC实体和一个MAC实体,如图2B中的RLC2和MAC2。对于终端侧设备来讲,终端设备针对该无线承载,包括一个PDCP实体、两个RLC实体和两个MAC实体,如图2B中的RLC1、MAC1、RLC2和MAC2。For the network side device, the DC scenario involves the primary network side device and the secondary network side device, then the primary network side device includes a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity for the radio bearer, as shown in RLC1 in Figure 2B And MAC1. For the radio bearer, the secondary network side device also includes an RLC entity and a MAC entity, such as RLC2 and MAC2 in Fig. 2B. For the terminal-side device, the terminal device includes one PDCP entity, two RLC entities, and two MAC entities for the radio bearer, such as RLC1, MAC1, RLC2, and MAC2 in Figure 2B.
在DC场景下,一个终端侧设备同时连接两个网络侧设备,也就是主网络侧设备和辅网络侧设备,如果主网络侧设备为某个无线承载配置了PDCP层的重复传输功能,那么在PDCP层经过复制的两个数据包将被传输给不同的两个RLC实体,并通过不同的逻辑信道传输给不同的MAC实体,最终在不同的小区上进行传输。这个过程对于网络侧设备和终端侧设备来说都是一样的,不同的是,对于网络侧设备来说,主网络侧设备中的PDCP层会将经过复制的两个数据包传输给不同的两个RLC实体,这两个RLC实体分别位于主网络侧设备和辅网络侧设备中,之后,主网络侧设备中的RLC实体将接收的数据包传输给主网络侧设备中的MAC实体,辅网络侧设备中的RLC实体将接收的数据包传输给辅网络侧设备中的MAC实体,这两个MAC实体会通过各自的小区传输数据包。而对于终端设备来说,两个RLC实体和两个MAC实体都位于该终端设备中,其他过程都是一样的。In the DC scenario, a terminal-side device is connected to two network-side devices at the same time, that is, the primary network-side device and the secondary network-side device. If the primary network-side device is configured with the PDCP layer repeated transmission function for a radio bearer, then The two data packets copied by the PDCP layer will be transmitted to two different RLC entities, and transmitted to different MAC entities through different logical channels, and finally transmitted on different cells. This process is the same for both the network side device and the terminal side device. The difference is that for the network side device, the PDCP layer in the main network side device will transmit the duplicated two data packets to different two devices. Two RLC entities, these two RLC entities are located in the primary network side device and the secondary network side device respectively. After that, the RLC entity in the primary network side device transmits the received data packet to the MAC entity in the primary network side device. The RLC entity in the side device transmits the received data packet to the MAC entity in the secondary network side device, and the two MAC entities will transmit the data packet through their respective cells. For the terminal device, the two RLC entities and the two MAC entities are located in the terminal device, and the other processes are the same.
主网络侧设备可以为主腿中的LCH配置对应的小区,例如,为LCH1配置CC1和CC2,辅网络侧设备可以为辅腿中的LCH配置对应的小区,例如,为LCH2配置CC3和CC4,对终端侧设备而言,主网络侧设备配置的多个小区可以称为主小区组(master cell group,MCG),辅网络侧设备配置的多个小区可以称为辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)。The primary network side device can configure the corresponding cell for the LCH in the primary leg, for example, configure CC1 and CC2 for LCH1, and the secondary network side device can configure the corresponding cell for the LCH in the secondary leg, for example, configure CC3 and CC4 for LCH2, For the terminal side device, the multiple cells configured by the primary network side device can be called a master cell group (MCG), and the multiple cells configured by the secondary network side device can be called a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG).
在DC场景下,当为一个无线承载配置DC分流承载(split bearer)时,终端侧设备可以通过终端侧设备的两个逻辑信道分别向主网络侧设备和辅网络侧设备传输不同的数据包。当为一个无线承载配置的PDCP层的重复传输功能被激活以后,PDCP层对数据包复制并通过两个逻辑信道传输,当为该无线承载配置的PDCP层的重复传输功能去激活以后,则回退到DC split bearer操作。In the DC scenario, when a DC split bearer is configured for a radio bearer, the terminal-side device can transmit different data packets to the primary network-side device and the secondary network-side device through the two logical channels of the terminal-side device. When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer configured for a radio bearer is activated, the PDCP layer copies the data packet and transmits it through two logical channels. When the repeated transmission function of the PDCP layer configured for the radio bearer is deactivated, it returns Return to DC split bearer operation.
目前,为支持工业物联网(industrial internet of things,IIoT)场景或者其他场景下的超高可靠(例如,误包率小于10 -9)和超低时延(例如,时延低于0.5毫秒(ms))的业务需求,网络侧设备可以为一个无线承载配置更多条腿进行重复传输。例如,可以给一个无线承载配置3条腿,如图3A所示。在图3A中,RLC1~RLC3分别与PDCP实体连接,且 RLC1~RLC3分别通过LCH1~LCH3关联到同一个MAC实体。或者,也可以给一个无线承载配置的4条腿,如图3B所示。在图3B中,RLC1~RLC4分别与PDCP实体连接,且RLC1和RLC2分别通过LCH1和LCH2与MAC1关联,RLC3和RLC4分别通过LCH3和LCH4与MAC2关联。当然,还可以为一个无线承载配置更多条腿,在此不一一说明。 At present, in order to support the ultra-high reliability (for example, the packet error rate is less than 10 -9 ) and ultra-low latency (for example, the delay is less than 0.5 milliseconds) in industrial internet of things (IIoT) scenarios or other scenarios ( ms)), the network side device can configure more legs for a radio bearer for repeated transmission. For example, three legs can be configured for a radio bearer, as shown in Figure 3A. In FIG. 3A, RLC1 to RLC3 are respectively connected to PDCP entities, and RLC1 to RLC3 are respectively associated with the same MAC entity through LCH1 to LCH3. Alternatively, four legs can be configured for one radio bearer, as shown in Figure 3B. In Fig. 3B, RLC1 to RLC4 are respectively connected to PDCP entities, RLC1 and RLC2 are respectively associated with MAC1 through LCH1 and LCH2, and RLC3 and RLC4 are respectively associated with MAC2 through LCH3 and LCH4. Of course, more legs can be configured for a radio bearer, which will not be explained here.
然而,当网络侧设备为一个无线承载配置更多条腿进行重复传输时,若多条腿的数据传输质量都较好,使用该多条腿对相同的数据包进行重复传输会造成资源浪费。因此,如何均衡重复传输功能中的传输质量和资源利用率是目前亟待解决的问题。However, when the network side device configures more legs for a radio bearer for repeated transmission, if the data transmission quality of the multiple legs is better, using the multiple legs to repeatedly transmit the same data packet will cause waste of resources. Therefore, how to balance the transmission quality and resource utilization in the repeated transmission function is a problem to be solved urgently.
鉴于此,本申请提供一种数据传输方法,用以在为无线承载配置多个逻辑信道的情形下,实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。In view of this, the present application provides a data transmission method to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization when multiple logical channels are configured for a radio bearer.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的技术方案。The following describes the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application in conjunction with the drawings.
请参考图4,本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法的流程图。Please refer to FIG. 4, which is a flowchart of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
S401、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送能力指示信息,网络侧设备接收该能力指示信息。S401: The terminal side device sends capability indication information to the network side device, and the network side device receives the capability indication information.
在本申请实施例中,该能力指示信息用于指示该终端侧设备是否支持确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道的功能(或者,可以理解为终端侧设备是否具备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道的能力)。In this embodiment of the application, the capability indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal-side device supports the function of determining the logical channel used for data transmission (or, it can be understood as whether the terminal-side device has the function of determining the logical channel used for data transmission. ability).
作为一种示例,终端侧设备可以通过是否发送该能力指示信息,来向网络侧设备指示该终端侧设备是否支持该确定用于数据传输的功能。例如,终端侧设备支持该功能,则向网络侧设备发送该能力指示信息,若终端侧设备不支持该功能,则不向网络侧设备发送该指示信息,这样,网络侧设备可以根据是否接收到终端侧设备的能力指示信息,确定该终端侧设备支持功能,即若接收到该能力指示信息,则网络侧设备确定支持该功能,否则,网络侧设备确定终端侧设备不支持该功能。As an example, the terminal-side device may indicate to the network-side device whether the terminal-side device supports the function determined to be used for data transmission by sending the capability indication information. For example, if the terminal-side device supports this function, it sends the capability indication information to the network-side device. If the terminal-side device does not support this function, it does not send the indication information to the network-side device. In this way, the network-side device can determine whether it receives The capability indication information of the terminal-side device determines that the terminal-side device supports the function, that is, if the capability indication information is received, the network-side device determines to support the function; otherwise, the network-side device determines that the terminal-side device does not support the function.
作为另一种示例,终端侧设备可以通过该能力指示信息中携带的内容,来向网络侧设备指示该终端侧设备是否支持该确定用于数据传输的功能。例如,可以通过该能力指示信息中的一个字段(或者一个比特)的取值来指示该终端侧设备是否支持该功能。网络侧设备在接收该能力指示信息后,确定该能力指示信息中该字段的取值是否为预设取值时,若为是则确定该终端侧设备支持该功能,否则,确定该终端侧设备不支持该功能。As another example, the terminal-side device may indicate to the network-side device whether the terminal-side device supports the function determined for data transmission through the content carried in the capability indication information. For example, the value of a field (or a bit) in the capability indication information may be used to indicate whether the terminal-side device supports the function. After the network-side device receives the capability indication information, when it determines whether the value of the field in the capability indication information is a preset value, if yes, it determines that the terminal-side device supports the function; otherwise, it determines that the terminal-side device This feature is not supported.
在本申请实施例中,以终端侧设备支持该功能为例进行说明。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal side device supports this function as an example for description.
需要说明的是,步骤S401为可选步骤,即不是必须要执行的,例如,可以将所有的终端侧设备配置为支持该功能,在这种情况下,则可以不用发送该指示信息。在图4中,以步骤S401为虚线,来表示该步骤为可选步骤。It should be noted that step S401 is an optional step, that is, it is not required to be performed. For example, all terminal-side devices can be configured to support this function. In this case, the instruction information need not be sent. In FIG. 4, step S401 is taken as a dotted line to indicate that this step is optional.
S402、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第一配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第一配置信令。S402: The network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
在本申请实施例中,该第一配置信令用于指示为终端侧设备的无线承载配置在至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能。作为一种示例,该第一配置信令中可以包括终端侧设备的无线承载的标识、该无线承载对应的PDCP实体的配置、为该无线承载配置的RLC实体的配置、与RLC实体对应的LCH的标识和配置以及MAC实体的配置等至少一项。例如,该第一配置信息包括无线承载X用于重复传输的RLC1~RLC4,与RLC1~RLC4一一对应的LCH1~LCH4以及一个MAC实体,终端侧设备在接收该第一配置信令后,则为该无线承载X创建对应的RLC实体以及MAC实体,并建立RLC实体、LCH以及MAC实体之间的对应关系,得到如图3A所示的CA场景。In the embodiment of the present application, the first configuration signaling is used to indicate the function of configuring the radio bearer of the terminal side device to repeatedly transmit on at least two logical channels. As an example, the first configuration signaling may include the identification of the radio bearer of the terminal-side device, the configuration of the PDCP entity corresponding to the radio bearer, the configuration of the RLC entity configured for the radio bearer, and the LCH corresponding to the RLC entity At least one of the identification and configuration of the MAC entity and the configuration of the MAC entity. For example, the first configuration information includes RLC1 to RLC4 used for repeated transmission by radio bearer X, LCH1 to LCH4 corresponding to RLC1 to RLC4 one-to-one, and a MAC entity. After the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling, then Create a corresponding RLC entity and MAC entity for the radio bearer X, and establish the corresponding relationship between the RLC entity, the LCH, and the MAC entity to obtain the CA scenario as shown in FIG. 3A.
在第一配置信令中,还可以指示为终端侧设备配置的至少两个LCH中的主LCH。例 如,该第一配置信令指示LCH1为该终端侧设备的主LCH,则当去激活该无线承载的重复传输功能时,则PDCP实体会将数据发送到LCH1上,而不会发送到其他LCH上。由于LCH与RLC实体一一对应,则指示至少两个LCH中的主LCH,也可以理解为指示为该终端侧设备的无线承载配置的至少两条腿中的主腿。当然,网络侧设备也可以不为该无线承载配置主LCH(或主腿),在此不作限制。In the first configuration signaling, it may also indicate the main LCH of the at least two LCHs configured for the terminal-side device. For example, the first configuration signaling indicates that LCH1 is the primary LCH of the terminal side device, and when the repeat transmission function of the radio bearer is deactivated, the PDCP entity will send the data to LCH1, but not to other LCHs on. Since the LCH and the RLC entity have a one-to-one correspondence, the indication of the main LCH of the at least two LCHs can also be understood as indicating the main leg of the at least two legs configured for the radio bearer of the terminal side device. Of course, the network side device may not configure the main LCH (or main leg) for the radio bearer, and there is no restriction here.
需要说明的是,LCH可以分为上行LCH和下行LCH,一个LCH标识可以用于标识一组LCH(即,上行LCH和与该上行LCH对应的下行LCH)。当终端侧设备需要向网络侧设备发送上行数据时,则通过上行LCH进行传输,相应地,当网络侧设备需要向终端侧设备发送下行数据时,则通过下行LCH进行传输。在本申请实施例中,一个LCH可以理解为是共用一个LCH标识的一组LCH。It should be noted that the LCH can be divided into an uplink LCH and a downlink LCH, and one LCH identifier can be used to identify a group of LCHs (that is, an uplink LCH and a downlink LCH corresponding to the uplink LCH). When the terminal-side device needs to send uplink data to the network-side device, it transmits it through the uplink LCH. Correspondingly, when the network-side device needs to send the downlink data to the terminal-side device, it transmits it through the downlink LCH. In the embodiment of this application, one LCH can be understood as a group of LCHs sharing one LCH identity.
S403、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第二配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第二配置信令。S403: The network side device sends the second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
在本申请实施例中,该第二配置信令用于指示为每个LCH配置关联(或映射)的小区。作为一种示例,如图5所示,网络侧设备为LCH1配置关联的服务小区为{CC1,CC2,CC3},为LCH2配置关联的服务小区为{CC4,CC5,CC6},为LCH3配置关联的服务小区为{CC7,CC8,CC9},为LCH4配置关联的服务小区为{CC10,CC11,CC12}。这样,当无线承载X的重复传输功能激活时,由终端侧设备的PDCP实体发送到某个LCH上的数据,只能通过与该LCH关联的服务小区的资源进行传输,例如,LCH1上的数据只能通过CC1~CC3上的资源进行传输,LCH2上的数据只能通过CC4~CC6上的资源进行传输,等等。In the embodiment of the present application, the second configuration signaling is used to instruct to configure the associated (or mapped) cell for each LCH. As an example, as shown in Figure 5, the network-side device configures the associated serving cell for LCH1 to {CC1, CC2, CC3}, configures the associated serving cell for LCH2 to {CC4, CC5, CC6}, and configures the associated serving cell for LCH3 The serving cell of is {CC7, CC8, CC9}, and the associated serving cell for LCH4 configuration is {CC10, CC11, CC12}. In this way, when the repeat transmission function of the radio bearer X is activated, the data sent by the PDCP entity of the terminal side device to a certain LCH can only be transmitted through the resources of the serving cell associated with the LCH, for example, the data on LCH1 It can only be transmitted through the resources on CC1 to CC3, and the data on LCH2 can only be transmitted through the resources on CC4 to CC6, and so on.
作为另一种示例,该第二配置信令也可以用于指示为每个LCH配置关联(或映射)的小区组。例如,预先将网络侧设备所包括的多个服务小区分为多个小区组,例如,{CC1,CC2,CC3}为小区组1,{CC4,CC5,CC6}为小区组2,等等,则该第二配置信令可以指示与LCH1关联的小区组为小区组1,与LCH2关联的小区组为小区组2,以此类推,在此不再赘述。As another example, the second configuration signaling may also be used to indicate that the associated (or mapped) cell group is configured for each LCH. For example, multiple serving cells included in the network side device are divided into multiple cell groups in advance, for example, {CC1, CC2, CC3} is cell group 1, {CC4, CC5, CC6} is cell group 2, etc., Then the second configuration signaling may indicate that the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, and the cell group associated with LCH2 is cell group 2, and so on, and will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,第一配置信令和第二配置信令可以是无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令,可以是媒介访问控制控制元素(medium access control control element,MAC CE)信令,或者,也可以是其他信令,在此不作限制。It should be noted that the first configuration signaling and the second configuration signaling may be radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, and may be medium access control control element (MAC CE) signaling. Or, it can also be other signaling, which is not limited here.
另外,需要说明的是,步骤S403是可选的步骤,即不是必须要执行的。例如,与每个LCH关联的小区或者小区组是预先设置的,也就是说,网络侧设备只需要为无线承载配置了用于重复传输的LCH,则该LCH上的数据便会使用预先设置好的小区中的资源进行传输。或者,第一配置信令和第二配置信令也可以是同一个配置信令,也就是说,在第一配置信令中同时指示为终端侧设备的无线承载配置重复传输功能以及为该重复传输功能中的每个LCH配置关联的小区。作为一种示例,可以通过第一配置信令中的某个参数来指示为每个LCH配置的小区组,例如,该参数可以是allowedServingCells参数。在图4中,以步骤S403为虚线,来表示该步骤为可选步骤。In addition, it should be noted that step S403 is an optional step, that is, it is not necessary to be performed. For example, the cell or cell group associated with each LCH is preset, that is, the network side device only needs to configure the LCH for repeated transmission for the radio bearer, and the data on the LCH will use the preset The resources in the cell are transmitted. Alternatively, the first configuration signaling and the second configuration signaling may also be the same configuration signaling, that is, the first configuration signaling indicates that the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with the repeated transmission function and the repeated transmission Each LCH in the transmission function configures the associated cell. As an example, a certain parameter in the first configuration signaling may be used to indicate the cell group configured for each LCH. For example, the parameter may be the allowedServingCells parameter. In FIG. 4, step S403 is taken as a dotted line to indicate that this step is optional.
S404、终端侧设备获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量。S404. The terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel of the at least two logical channels.
在本申请实施例中,该至少两个逻辑信道即步骤S402中由网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载X配置的多个LCH,即LCH1~LCH4。In the embodiment of the present application, the at least two logical channels are multiple LCHs configured by the network side device for the radio bearer X of the terminal side device in step S402, namely, LCH1 to LCH4.
需要说明的是,由于本申请实施例中的一个逻辑信道可以理解为共用一个逻辑信道标识的一组逻辑信道(即上行逻辑信道和下行逻辑信道),则一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输 质量,可以理解为,与该逻辑信道标识对应的上行逻辑信道的数据传输质量。在本申请实施例中,上行逻辑信道和下行逻辑信道关联(或映射)同一个小区组。It should be noted that since a logical channel in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a group of logical channels (ie, uplink logical channel and downlink logical channel) sharing a logical channel identifier, the uplink data transmission quality of a logical channel can be It is understood that the data transmission quality of the uplink logical channel corresponding to the logical channel identifier. In the embodiment of the present application, the uplink logical channel and the downlink logical channel are associated (or mapped) to the same cell group.
由于一个逻辑信道的数据只能使用与该逻辑信道关联的小区组所包括的小区的资源进行传输,因此,一个逻辑信道的数据传输质量可以通过与该逻辑信道关联的小区组的信道质量进行衡量。也就是说,一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量可以通过该逻辑信道关联的小区组的上行信道质量进行衡量。通常来讲,上行信道质量是由网络侧设备通过监听终端侧设备在小区的上行参考信号或者终端侧设备在小区上发送的上行信号的强度来推断的。但是,一个小区的上行信道质量和下行信道质量通常是有一定关联的,例如,一个小区的信道质量好,则该小区的上行信道质量和下行信道质量都比较好,若该小区的信道质量差,则该小区的上行信道质量和下行信道质量都比较差,而出现一个小区的上行信道质量好但是下行信道质量差的情况或者上行信道质量差但下行信道质量好的情况的概率较低,因此,从这个角度上来说,通过测量小区的下行信道质量,也可以反推该小区的上行信道质量。Since the data of a logical channel can only be transmitted using the resources of the cells included in the cell group associated with the logical channel, the data transmission quality of a logical channel can be measured by the channel quality of the cell group associated with the logical channel . In other words, the uplink data transmission quality of a logical channel can be measured by the uplink channel quality of the cell group associated with the logical channel. Generally speaking, the uplink channel quality is inferred by the network side device by monitoring the uplink reference signal of the terminal side device in the cell or the strength of the uplink signal sent by the terminal side device on the cell. However, the uplink channel quality and downlink channel quality of a cell are usually related to a certain extent. For example, if the channel quality of a cell is good, the uplink channel quality and downlink channel quality of the cell are both better. If the channel quality of the cell is poor , Then the uplink channel quality and downlink channel quality of the cell are relatively poor, and there is a low probability that the uplink channel quality of a cell is good but the downlink channel quality is poor, or the uplink channel quality is poor but the downlink channel quality is good. From this point of view, by measuring the downlink channel quality of the cell, the uplink channel quality of the cell can also be deduced.
鉴于此,在本申请实施例中,针对网络侧设备为该终端侧设备配置的至少两个逻辑信道中的任意一个逻辑信道(称为第一逻辑信道),通过终端侧设备获取与第一逻辑信道关联的小区组的下行信道质量来表征该第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量。In view of this, in this embodiment of the application, for any one of the at least two logical channels configured by the network-side device for the terminal-side device (referred to as the first logical channel), the terminal-side device obtains the connection with the first logical channel. The downlink channel quality of the cell group associated with the channel represents the uplink data transmission quality of the first logical channel.
下面,对终端侧设备获取与第一逻辑信道相关联的小区组的下行信道质量的过程进行说明。In the following, the process in which the terminal-side device obtains the downlink channel quality of the cell group associated with the first logical channel will be described.
第一逻辑信道的数据传输质量包括但不限于如下信息中的至少一种或多种:The data transmission quality of the first logical channel includes but is not limited to at least one or more of the following information:
1、第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中所有小区的信道质量的最大值。1. The maximum value of channel quality of all cells in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
作为一种示例,第一逻辑信道为LCH1,与LCH1关联的(或映射)小区组为小区组1,即包括{CC1,CC2,CC3},则终端侧设备首先获取小区组1中每个小区的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备获取CC1的下行信道质量为信道质量1,CC2的下行信道质量为信道质量2,CC3的下行信道质量为信道质量3,然后,终端侧设备判断出信道质量1>信道质量2>信道质量3,则确定LCH1的下行信道质量为信道质量1。As an example, the first logical channel is LCH1, and the cell group associated (or mapped) with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes {CC1, CC2, CC3}, and the terminal-side device first obtains each cell in cell group 1. For example, the downlink channel quality of CC1 obtained by the terminal-side device is channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 is channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 is channel quality 3. Then, the terminal-side device determines the channel quality 1>channel quality 2>channel quality 3, the downlink channel quality of LCH1 is determined to be channel quality 1.
2、第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中所有小区的信道质量的平均值。2. The average channel quality of all cells in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
作为一种示例,第一逻辑信道为LCH1,与LCH1关联的小区组为小区组1,即包括{CC1,CC2,CC3},则终端侧设备首先获取小区组1中每个小区的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备获取CC1的下行信道质量为信道质量1,CC2的下行信道质量为信道质量2,CC3的下行信道质量为信道质量3,然后,终端侧设备获取这3个小区的下行信道质量的平均值,即(信道质量1+信道质量2+信道质量3)/3,并确定该平均值即为LCH1的下行信道质量。As an example, the first logical channel is LCH1, and the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes {CC1, CC2, CC3}, and the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1. For example, the terminal side device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3. Then, the terminal side device obtains the downlink channels of these 3 cells The average value of the quality is (channel quality 1+channel quality 2+channel quality 3)/3, and it is determined that the average value is the downlink channel quality of LCH1.
3、第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中K个小区的信道质量的平均值。3. The average channel quality of the K cells in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
在这种情况下,该K个小区为第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中根据信道质量从高到低排序后的前K个小区,K为大于或等于2的整数。In this case, the K cells are the first K cells sorted from high to low in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
作为一种示例,以K的取值为2进行说明。第一逻辑信道为LCH1,与LCH1关联的小区组为小区组1,即包括{CC1,CC2,CC3},则终端侧设备首先获取小区组1中每个小区的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备获取CC1的下行信道质量为信道质量1,CC2的下行信道质量为信道质量2,CC3的下行信道质量为信道质量3,然后,终端侧设备根据这3个小区的下行信道质量的大小,依次将这3个下行信道质量进行排序。例如,终端侧设备 判断出信道质量1>信道质量2>信道质量3,从而得到排序后的3个下行信道质量为:信道质量1、信道质量2、信道质量3,从这3个信道质量中选择前2个,即信道质量1和信道质量2,求取这2个信道质量的平均值,即(信道质量1+信道质量2)/2,并确定该平均值即为LCH1的下行信道质量。As an example, the value of K is 2 for description. The first logical channel is LCH1, and the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes {CC1, CC2, CC3}, then the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1, for example, the terminal side The device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3. Then, the terminal-side device according to the size of the downlink channel quality of the 3 cells, sequentially Sort the quality of these 3 downlink channels. For example, the terminal-side device judges that channel quality 1>channel quality 2>channel quality 3, and the sorted 3 downlink channel qualities are: channel quality 1, channel quality 2, channel quality 3. From these 3 channel qualities Choose the first two, namely channel quality 1 and channel quality 2, find the average of these two channel qualities, namely (channel quality 1 + channel quality 2)/2, and determine that the average is the downlink channel quality of LCH1 .
需要说明的是,K可以是协议预定义的,也可以是由网络侧设备通过配置信息指示给终端侧设备的,该配置信息可以是***消息或者RRC专用信令等,在此不作限制。另外,该K的取值可以是与第一逻辑信道对应的。例如,网络侧设备为该无线承载配置了4个逻辑信道,则每一个逻辑信道对应一个K的取值,即LCH1对应K1,LCH2对应K2,LCH3对应K3,LCH4对应K4。在这种情况下,为每一个逻辑信道独立配置一个K的取值(即per leg配置)。该K的取值可以是与无线承载对应的。例如,网络侧设备为无线承载X配置了4个逻辑信道,则该4个逻辑信道对应的K的取值相同,而不同的无线承载,例如无线承载X和无线承载Y可以对应不同的K的取值(即per RB配置)。该K的取值也可以是与终端侧设备对应的,也就是说,为该终端侧设备的任意一个无线承载配置的任意一个逻辑信道对应的K的取值相同,而不同的终端侧设备,例如第一终端侧设备和第二终端侧设备可以对应不同的K的取值(即per UE配置)。本领域技术人员可以根据实际使用需求进行设置。It should be noted that K may be predefined by the protocol, or may be indicated by the network side device to the terminal side device through configuration information. The configuration information may be a system message or RRC dedicated signaling, etc., which is not limited here. In addition, the value of K may correspond to the first logical channel. For example, the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, and each logical channel corresponds to a value of K, that is, LCH1 corresponds to K1, LCH2 corresponds to K2, LCH3 corresponds to K3, and LCH4 corresponds to K4. In this case, a value of K is independently configured for each logical channel (ie, per leg configuration). The value of K may correspond to the radio bearer. For example, if the network side device configures 4 logical channels for radio bearer X, the values of K corresponding to the 4 logical channels are the same, but different radio bearers, for example, radio bearer X and radio bearer Y can correspond to different K Value (that is, per RB configuration). The value of K may also correspond to the terminal-side device, that is, the value of K corresponding to any logical channel configured for any radio bearer of the terminal-side device is the same, and different terminal-side devices, For example, the first terminal-side device and the second terminal-side device may correspond to different values of K (that is, per UE configuration). Those skilled in the art can make settings according to actual usage requirements.
4、第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中至少一个第一小区的信道质量的平均值,每个第一小区的信道质量超过预设阈值。4. The average channel quality of at least one first cell in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel, and the channel quality of each first cell exceeds a preset threshold.
作为一种示例,第一逻辑信道为LCH1,与LCH1关联的小区组为小区组1,即包括{CC1,CC2,CC3},则终端侧设备首先获取小区组1中每个小区的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备获取CC1的下行信道质量为信道质量1,CC2的下行信道质量为信道质量2,CC3的下行信道质量为信道质量3,然后,比较这3个小区的下行信道质量与预设阈值的大小关系,从这3个下行信道质量中确定出大于该预设阈值的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备判断出信道质量1和信道质量2均大于预设阈值,则终端侧设备获取信道质量1和信道质量2的平均值,即(信道质量1+信道质量2)/2,并确定该平均值即为LCH1的下行信道质量。As an example, the first logical channel is LCH1, and the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes {CC1, CC2, CC3}, and the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1. For example, the terminal side device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3, and then compares the downlink channel quality of these three cells with the pre- Set the relationship between the threshold value and determine the downlink channel quality greater than the preset threshold from the three downlink channel qualities. For example, if the terminal-side device determines that channel quality 1 and channel quality 2 are both greater than the preset threshold, the terminal-side device Obtain the average value of channel quality 1 and channel quality 2, that is, (channel quality 1+channel quality 2)/2, and determine that the average value is the downlink channel quality of LCH1.
需要说明的是,该预设阈值可以是协议预定义的,也可以是由网络侧设备通过配置信息指示的,且该预设阈值可以是per leg配置或者per RB配置或者per UE配置,具体的配置方式可以参考第3种情况中的K的设置方式,在此不再赘述。可选的,上述预设阈值也可以是与小区(cell)/载波(carrier)对应的,即per cell/carrier配置的,不同的小区/载波可以独立的配置预设阈值。It should be noted that the preset threshold may be predefined by the protocol, or indicated by the network side device through configuration information, and the preset threshold may be per leg configuration or per RB configuration or per UE configuration. The configuration method can refer to the setting method of K in the third case, which will not be repeated here. Optionally, the foregoing preset threshold may also correspond to a cell/carrier, that is, configured per cell/carrier, and different cells/carriers may independently configure the preset threshold.
5、第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中的P个第二小区的信道质量的平均值,该P个第二小区为该小区组中信道质量超过预设阈值且根据信道质量从高到低排序后的前P个小区,P为大于1且小于或等于K的整数。5. The average value of the channel quality of the P second cells in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel. The P second cells are the channel quality of the cell group exceeding the preset threshold and are sorted according to the channel quality from high to low. For the first P cells, P is an integer greater than 1 and less than or equal to K.
作为一种示例,第一逻辑信道为LCH1,与LCH1关联的小区组为小区组1,即包括{CC1,CC2,CC3},则终端侧设备首先获取小区组1中每个小区的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备获取CC1的下行信道质量为信道质量1,CC2的下行信道质量为信道质量2,CC3的下行信道质量为信道质量3,然后,比较这3个小区的下行信道质量与预设阈值的大小关系,从这3个下行信道质量中确定出大于该预设阈值的下行信道质量,例如,终端侧设备判断出信道质量1~信道质量3均大于预设阈值,且信道质量1>信道质量2>信道质 量3。假设P的取值为2,则终端侧设备获取信道质量1和信道质量2的平均值,即(信道质量1+信道质量2)/2,并确定该平均值即为LCH1的下行信道质量。As an example, the first logical channel is LCH1, and the cell group associated with LCH1 is cell group 1, that is, it includes {CC1, CC2, CC3}, and the terminal side device first obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell in cell group 1. For example, the terminal side device obtains the downlink channel quality of CC1 as channel quality 1, the downlink channel quality of CC2 as channel quality 2, and the downlink channel quality of CC3 as channel quality 3, and then compares the downlink channel quality of these three cells with the pre- Set the relationship between the threshold value and determine the downlink channel quality greater than the preset threshold from the three downlink channel qualities. For example, the terminal side device determines that channel quality 1 to channel quality 3 are all greater than the preset threshold, and channel quality 1 > Channel quality 2> Channel quality 3. Assuming the value of P is 2, the terminal side device obtains the average value of channel quality 1 and channel quality 2, that is, (channel quality 1+channel quality 2)/2, and determines that the average value is the downlink channel quality of LCH1.
在这种情况下,该小区组中信道质量超过预设阈值的小区的数量可能大于P的取值,也可能小于P的取值,当小区组中信道质量超过预设阈值的小区的数量小于P的取值时,则用于确定该小区组的信道质量的小区数量将小于P的取值。因此,在这种情况下,第一逻辑信道对应的小区组的信道质量,可以理解为,至多P个第二小区的信道质量的平均值。In this case, the number of cells in the cell group whose channel quality exceeds the preset threshold may be greater than the value of P, or may be less than the value of P. When the number of cells in the cell group whose channel quality exceeds the preset threshold is less than When the value of P is set, the number of cells used to determine the channel quality of the cell group will be smaller than the value of P. Therefore, in this case, the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel can be understood as the average of the channel quality of at most P second cells.
可选的,当没有小区信道质量超过预设阈值,第一逻辑信道对应的小区组的信道质量可以是所有小区信道质量的最大值。Optionally, when the channel quality of no cell exceeds a preset threshold, the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel may be the maximum value of the channel quality of all cells.
其中,P的配置方式与前述K的配置方式相同,在此不再赘述。Wherein, the configuration mode of P is the same as the configuration mode of K, which will not be repeated here.
6、在预设时长内终端侧设备在第一逻辑信道上传输数据的失败率或成功率。6. The failure rate or success rate of the terminal side device in transmitting data on the first logical channel within the preset time period.
作为一种示例,终端侧设备可以通过RLC状态报告反馈的确认消息(acknowledge,ACK)或非确认消息(non-acknowledge,NACK)推导得到该第一逻辑信道的数据传输失败率和成功率。例如,获取预设时长(例如,5分钟)内数据传输的总次数N1,接收到ACK的总次数为N2,以及接收到NACK的总次数为N3,则该第一逻辑信道的数据传输失败率为N3/N1,若数据传输失败率越大,则表示该第一逻辑信道的信道质量越差。或者,也可以获取该第一逻辑信道的数据传输成功率,例如,该第一逻辑信道的数据传输成功率为N2/N1,若数据传输成功率越大,则表示该第一逻辑信道的信道质量越好。上述预设时长可以是由网络侧设备配置的,也可以是终端侧设备选择的或预先配置好的,在此不做限定。As an example, the terminal-side device can derive the data transmission failure rate and success rate of the first logical channel through an acknowledgement message (acknowledge, ACK) or non-acknowledgement (NACK) fed back by the RLC status report. For example, obtaining the total number of data transmissions N1 within a preset duration (for example, 5 minutes), the total number of received ACKs is N2, and the total number of received NACKs is N3, then the data transmission failure rate of the first logical channel It is N3/N1, if the data transmission failure rate is greater, it means that the channel quality of the first logical channel is worse. Alternatively, the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel can also be obtained. For example, the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel is N2/N1. If the data transmission success rate is greater, it means the channel of the first logical channel The better the quality. The foregoing preset duration may be configured by the network-side device, or may be selected by the terminal-side device or configured in advance, which is not limited here.
作为另一种示例,终端侧设备可以通过MAC层HARQ反馈的ACK或者NACK推导得到该第一逻辑信道的数据传输失败率和成功率。具体方式和上述通过RLC状态报告反馈的ACK或NACK推导得到该第一逻辑信道的数据传输失败率和成功率相同,在此不再赘述。As another example, the terminal-side device may derive the data transmission failure rate and the success rate of the first logical channel through the ACK or NACK fed back by the HARQ at the MAC layer. The specific method is the same as the data transmission failure rate and the success rate of the first logical channel obtained by deriving the ACK or NACK feedback from the RLC status report, and will not be repeated here.
作为另一种示例,通过网络侧设备调度新传资源或重传资源推导得到第一逻辑信道的数据传输失败率和成功率。例如,获取预设时长(例如,5分钟)内网络侧设备为终端侧设备调度资源的总次数N1,其中调度新传资源的总次数为N2,以及调度重传资源的总次数为N3,则该第一逻辑信道的数据传输失败率为N3/N1,若数据传输失败率越大,则表示该第一逻辑信道的信道质量越差。或者,也可以获取该第一逻辑信道的数据传输成功率,例如,该第一逻辑信道的数据传输成功率为N2/N1,若数据传输成功率越大,则表示该第一逻辑信道的信道质量越好。As another example, the data transmission failure rate and success rate of the first logical channel are derived by scheduling new transmission resources or retransmission resources by the network side device. For example, acquiring the total number of times N1 that the network-side device schedules resources for the terminal-side device within a preset time period (for example, 5 minutes), where the total number of times for scheduling new transmission resources is N2, and the total number of times for scheduling retransmission resources is N3, then The data transmission failure rate of the first logical channel is N3/N1. If the data transmission failure rate is greater, it means that the channel quality of the first logical channel is worse. Alternatively, the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel can also be obtained. For example, the data transmission success rate of the first logical channel is N2/N1. If the data transmission success rate is greater, it means the channel of the first logical channel The better the quality.
在具体实施过程中,可以通过上述6种信息中的任意一种信息来表示第一逻辑信道的下行信道质量,或者,也可以根据上述6种信息中的多种信息的组合来综合表示第一逻辑信道的下行信道质量,在此不作限制。当然,也可以采用其他方式获取每个逻辑信道的下行信道质量,在此不一一举例。In the specific implementation process, the downlink channel quality of the first logical channel can be represented by any one of the above six types of information, or the first logical channel can also be comprehensively represented based on the combination of multiple types of information in the above six types of information. The downlink channel quality of the logical channel is not limited here. Of course, other methods can also be used to obtain the downlink channel quality of each logical channel, and no examples are given here.
需要说明的是,针对第6种方式,终端侧设备可以通过第6种方式确定每个逻辑信道的下行信道质量,然后根据下行信道质量反推每个逻辑信道的上行信道质量,终端侧设备也可以通过第6种方式直接获取上行数据传输的质量,例如通过网络侧设备对终端侧设备上行传输数据反馈的RLC状态报告,或者HARQ反馈结果,或者基于网络侧设备调度新传或重传资源确定的上行逻辑信道的传输质量等,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that for the sixth method, the terminal-side device can determine the downlink channel quality of each logical channel through the sixth method, and then inversely deduct the uplink channel quality of each logical channel according to the downlink channel quality, and the terminal-side device also The quality of uplink data transmission can be directly obtained in the sixth way, for example, the RLC status report that the network side device feeds back to the terminal side device's uplink transmission data, or the HARQ feedback result, or the determination based on the network side device scheduling new transmission or retransmission resources The transmission quality of the uplink logical channel of the, etc. will not be repeated here.
另外,需要说明的是,上述6种信息是以获取的信息的取值越大则表示第一逻辑信道的数据传输质量越好为例进行说明。在一些实施例中,会存在获取的信息的取值越小则表 示第一逻辑信道的下行信道质量越好,在这种情况下,则上述6中信息应该进行适应性调整,例如,第1种信息应该替换为“获取第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中所有小区的信道质量的最小值”,第4种信息应该替换为“第一逻辑信道对应的小区组中至少一个第一小区的信道质量的平均值,每个第一小区的信道质量小于或等于预设阈值”等等,本申请实施例也应该包括这种情况,在此不一一说明。In addition, it should be noted that the above 6 types of information are described as an example in which the larger the value of the acquired information, the better the data transmission quality of the first logical channel. In some embodiments, the smaller the value of the acquired information, the better the downlink channel quality of the first logical channel. In this case, the information in 6 above should be adjusted adaptively, for example, the first This information should be replaced with "get the minimum channel quality of all cells in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel", and the fourth information should be replaced with "the channel of at least one first cell in the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel" The average value of the quality, the channel quality of each first cell is less than or equal to the preset threshold" and so on. The embodiments of the present application should also include this situation, and will not be described here.
下面,对终端侧设备获取任意一个小区的信道质量的过程进行说明。In the following, the process for the terminal side device to obtain the channel quality of any cell will be described.
在本申请实施例中,一个小区的信道质量包括终端侧设备在该小区测量的参考信号的参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)或参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)或信干噪比(signal to interference and noise ratio,SINR)或接收信号强度指示(received signal strength indication,RSSI)等,或者其他反映信道传输质量的参数。In the embodiment of this application, the channel quality of a cell includes the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) or reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ) of the reference signal measured by the terminal-side device in the cell. Signal to interference and noise ratio (SINR) or received signal strength indication (RSSI), etc., or other parameters that reflect channel transmission quality.
由于终端侧设备在不同的小区上能够测量到的参考信号的类型不同,例如,在一个小区上测量到的参考信号可以是同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB),而在另一个小区上测量到的参考信号可以是信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS),不同类型的参考信号的发射功率以及占用的频域带宽可能都不相同。在这种情况下,如果仅将终端侧设备在不同小区上对参考信号的测量结果进行比较或者求平均值,可能会造成较大的误差,因此,为了能够有效地衡量不同小区的信道质量,本申请实施例中可以采用如下两种处理方式:Since the types of reference signals that can be measured by the terminal-side equipment on different cells are different, for example, the reference signal measured on one cell can be a synchronization signal block (SSB), and measured on another cell The received reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), and the transmit power and occupied frequency domain bandwidth of different types of reference signals may be different. In this case, if the terminal side equipment only compares or averages the measurement results of the reference signals in different cells, it may cause large errors. Therefore, in order to effectively measure the channel quality of different cells, The following two processing methods can be used in the embodiments of this application:
第一种处理方式:The first approach:
终端侧设备使用相同类型的参考信号测量与该至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量。具体来讲,用于测量每个小区组中的小区的信道质量的参考信号可以预先配置,或者通过网络侧设备通过配置信令指示。The terminal-side device uses the same type of reference signal to measure the channel quality of the cell group respectively corresponding to the at least two logical channels. Specifically, the reference signal used to measure the channel quality of the cells in each cell group may be pre-configured or indicated by the network side device through configuration signaling.
作为一种示例,网络侧设备可以配置一个小区组中各个小区使用相同类型的参考信号。例如,网络侧设备为小区组1配置的参考信号为SSB,网络侧设备为小区组2配置的参考信号为CSI-RS,这样,终端侧设备在测量小区组1中每个小区的信道质量时,则会使用SSB,在测量小区组2中每个小区的信道质量时,则会使用CSI-RS。这样,可以减少一个小区组中测量的信道质量的误差。As an example, the network side device may configure each cell in a cell group to use the same type of reference signal. For example, the reference signal configured by the network side device for cell group 1 is SSB, and the reference signal configured by the network side device for cell group 2 is CSI-RS. In this way, when the terminal side device measures the channel quality of each cell in cell group 1, , SSB will be used, and CSI-RS will be used when measuring the channel quality of each cell in cell group 2. In this way, the error of the channel quality measured in a cell group can be reduced.
作为另一种示例,网络侧设备可以配置与该无线承载X的每个逻辑信道相关联的小区组都使用相同的参考信号。例如,网络侧设备为小区组1~小区组4配置的参考信号为SSB,这样,终端侧设备在测量每个小区的信道质量时,都会使用SSB,从而可以减少不同小区组测量的信道质量的误差。As another example, the network-side device may configure the cell group associated with each logical channel of the radio bearer X to use the same reference signal. For example, the reference signal configured by the network side device for cell group 1 to cell group 4 is SSB. In this way, the terminal side device will use SSB when measuring the channel quality of each cell, which can reduce the channel quality measured by different cell groups. error.
第二种处理方式:The second approach:
终端侧设备使用不同类型的参考信号测量与该至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量。The terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell groups respectively corresponding to the at least two logical channels.
在这种方式下,当终端侧设备使用不同类型的参考信号测量与该至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量时,终端侧设备确定使用第一类型的参考信号进行测量的小区组(可以称为第一小区组)的信道质量为终端侧设备在该小区组获取的测量结果与预设偏移量的和值,该第一类型的参考信号为所述不同类型的参考信号中的其中一种类型的参考信号,可以是协议规定的或者是由网络侧设备指示的或者也可以是终端设备选择的。In this manner, when the terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels, the terminal-side device determines the cell group that uses the first type of reference signal for measurement The channel quality of (may be called the first cell group) is the sum of the measurement result obtained by the terminal device in the cell group and the preset offset, and the first type of reference signal is among the different types of reference signals One of the types of reference signals may be specified by the protocol or instructed by the network side device or selected by the terminal device.
作为一种示例,终端侧设备可以以其中一种类型的参考信号为基准,例如,以CSI-RS 为基准,如果一个小区测量到的参考信号不是CSI-RS,例如为SSB,则终端侧设备再获取该小区的测量结果后,则在该测量结果上加上一个预设偏移值△。以终端侧设备测量每个小区的RSRP为例,小区组1包括小区1和小区2,终端侧设备在小区1上测量CSI-RS得到的RSRP值为RSRP1,终端侧设备在小区2上测量SSB得到的RSRP值为RSRP2,则终端侧设备需要对小区2的测量结果进行处理,得到小区2的最终测量结果为RSRP2+△,然后再将RSRP1和RSRP2+△进行比较或者进行求平均运算,得到小区组1的信道质量。As an example, the terminal-side device may use one of the types of reference signals as a reference, for example, CSI-RS as a reference. If the reference signal measured by a cell is not a CSI-RS, such as SSB, the terminal-side device After obtaining the measurement result of the cell, a preset offset value △ is added to the measurement result. Take the terminal-side equipment measuring the RSRP of each cell as an example. Cell group 1 includes cell 1 and cell 2. The terminal-side equipment measures CSI-RS on cell 1 and the RSRP value is RSRP1. The terminal-side equipment measures SSB on cell 2. If the RSRP value obtained is RSRP2, the terminal device needs to process the measurement result of cell 2 to obtain the final measurement result of cell 2 as RSRP2+△, and then compare RSRP1 with RSRP2+△ or perform an average operation to obtain the cell group The channel quality of 1.
需要说明的是,该预设偏移值可以是协议预定义或者由网络侧设备配置的,该预设偏移值可以为正值或负值或为零,具体取值可以通过多次测量实验得到,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the preset offset value can be pre-defined by the protocol or configured by the network side device. The preset offset value can be positive or negative or zero. The specific value can be obtained through multiple measurement experiments. Get it, I won’t repeat it here.
另外,需要说明的是,终端侧设备在一个小区上的测量结果可以是终端侧设备的物理层直接测量到的值(可以理解为L1(层1)测量结果),也可以是终端侧设备经过过滤和平滑处理后得到的在RRC层的值(可以理解为L3(层3)测量结果)。且,终端侧设备在一个小区上的测量结果可以直接使用,或者,也可以换算为单位带宽上的相应数值再进行使用。例如,以RSRP为例,终端侧设备在一个小区上测量到RSRP后,可以将该测量到的RSRP换算为单位带宽上的信号接收功率再进行使用。In addition, it should be noted that the measurement result of the terminal-side device on a cell can be the value directly measured by the physical layer of the terminal-side device (it can be understood as the L1 (layer 1) measurement result), or it can be the value that the terminal-side device passes through The value in the RRC layer obtained after filtering and smoothing (can be understood as the L3 (layer 3) measurement result). In addition, the measurement result of the terminal-side device on a cell can be used directly, or it can be converted to a corresponding value on the unit bandwidth and then used. For example, taking RSRP as an example, after the terminal-side device measures RSRP on a cell, it can convert the measured RSRP into signal received power per unit bandwidth and then use it.
当终端侧设备获取每个小区组的下行信道质量后,则可以直接将该下行信道质量作为该小区组的上行信道质量进行使用,或者,可以将下行信道质量进行预设处理之后,例如,加上固定值,作为小区的上行信道质量使用,该固定值可以是预配置的,或者可以是通过***信息或者RRC信令进行配置的,在此不作限制。After the terminal-side device obtains the downlink channel quality of each cell group, it can directly use the downlink channel quality as the uplink channel quality of the cell group, or it can preset the downlink channel quality, for example, add The upper fixed value is used as the uplink channel quality of the cell. The fixed value can be pre-configured or can be configured through system information or RRC signaling, which is not limited here.
S405、网络侧设备发送第一指示,终端侧设备接收该第一指示。S405. The network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device receives the first instruction.
在本申请实施例中,该第一指示用于指示至少一个传输质量门限,该至少一个传输质量门限用于终端侧设备确定用于重复传输的逻辑信道。该传输质量门限可以理解为前述RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI等的门限值。该第一指示,可以携带在RRC信令中,可以和步骤S402中的第一配置信令和/或S403中的第二配置信令包含在同一条控制信令中。In the embodiment of the present application, the first indication is used to indicate at least one transmission quality threshold, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine a logical channel used for repeated transmission. The transmission quality threshold can be understood as the aforementioned RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI threshold. The first indication may be carried in RRC signaling, and may be included in the same control signaling as the first configuration signaling in step S402 and/or the second configuration signaling in S403.
该至少一个传输质量门限根据网络侧设备为无线承载配置的逻辑信道的类型(主逻辑信道或辅逻辑信道)不同,可以包括但不限于如下四种情况。The at least one transmission quality threshold is different according to the type of logical channel (primary logical channel or auxiliary logical channel) configured by the network side device for the radio bearer, and may include but is not limited to the following four situations.
第一种情况:The first situation:
所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,则所述至少一个传输质量门限包括N个第一传输质量门限和M*N个第二传输质量门限,所述N个第一传输质量门限与所述主逻辑信道关联,所述M*N个第二传输质量门限与所述至少一个辅逻辑信道关联,M、N为大于或等于1的整数。If the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, the at least one transmission quality threshold includes N first transmission quality thresholds and M*N second transmission quality thresholds, and the N The first transmission quality thresholds are associated with the primary logical channel, the M*N second transmission quality thresholds are associated with the at least one secondary logical channel, and M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1.
具体来讲,当网络侧设备为终端设备的无线承载配置了用于重复传输的多个逻辑信道,且该多个逻辑信道中有一个逻辑信道被配置为主逻辑信道(或者,该多条腿中的一条腿被配置为主腿),则网络侧设备可以为主逻辑信道和辅逻辑信道分别设置多个传输质量门限。例如,针对主逻辑信道配置N个第一传输质量门限,并且,针对至少一个辅逻辑信道,配置M*N个第二传输门限。Specifically, when the network side device configures multiple logical channels for repeated transmission for the radio bearer of the terminal device, and one of the multiple logical channels is configured as the primary logical channel (or, the multiple leg One of the legs is configured as the main leg), the network side device can set multiple transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel and the auxiliary logical channel respectively. For example, N first transmission quality thresholds are configured for the primary logical channel, and M*N second transmission thresholds are configured for at least one secondary logical channel.
以N的取值是3为例,作为一种示例,网络侧设备可以为主逻辑信道配置3个第一传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3。为至少一个辅逻辑信道配置3个第二传输质量门限,分别为T1’、T2’和T3’,也就是说,该无线承载的所有的辅逻辑信道共用一组传输质量门限。3个第一传输质量门限可以和3个第二传输质量门限一一对应,即,T1与T1’对应,T2与T2’对应,T3与T3’对应,每个传输质量门限的具体值可以根据实际使用进 行设置。Taking the value of N as 3 as an example, as an example, the network side device may configure three first transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3. Configure three second transmission quality thresholds for at least one secondary logical channel, namely T1', T2' and T3', that is, all secondary logical channels carried by the radio share a set of transmission quality thresholds. The three first transmission quality thresholds can correspond to the three second transmission quality thresholds one-to-one, that is, T1 corresponds to T1', T2 corresponds to T2', and T3 corresponds to T3'. The specific value of each transmission quality threshold can be based on Set it up in actual use.
作为另一种示例,网络侧设备可以为主逻辑信道配置3个第一传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3。为至少一个辅逻辑信道中的每一个辅逻辑信道配置3个第二传输质量门限,也就是说,如果该无线承载包括M个辅逻辑信道,则网络侧设备为M个辅逻辑信道配置M组第二传输质量门限,每一组第二传输质量门限对应一个辅逻辑信道。3个第一传输质量门限分别与为每一个辅逻辑信道配置的3个第二传输质量门限一一对应。As another example, the network side device may configure three first transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3, respectively. Configure three second transmission quality thresholds for each secondary logical channel in at least one secondary logical channel, that is, if the radio bearer includes M secondary logical channels, the network side device configures M groups of M secondary logical channels The second transmission quality threshold, each group of second transmission quality thresholds corresponds to a secondary logical channel. The three first transmission quality thresholds respectively correspond to the three second transmission quality thresholds configured for each auxiliary logical channel one-to-one.
作为另一种示例,网络侧设备为该终端侧设备配置了3个第一传输质量门限和3个第二传输质量门限,其中,3个第一传输质量门限与该终端侧设备所包括的所有的无线承载的主逻辑信道对应,3个第二传输门限与该终端侧设备所包括的所有的无线承载的辅逻辑信道对应。As another example, the network-side device configures three first transmission quality thresholds and three second transmission quality thresholds for the terminal-side device. Among them, the three first transmission quality thresholds are the same as those included in the terminal-side device. Corresponds to the primary logical channel of the radio bearer, and the three second transmission thresholds correspond to all the secondary logical channels of the radio bearer included in the terminal-side device.
第二种情况:The second case:
所述至少一个传输质量门限与所述至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道对应。也就是说,该至少一个传输质量门限可以适用于每一个逻辑信道。The at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to each of the at least two logical channels. In other words, the at least one transmission quality threshold can be applied to each logical channel.
作为一种示例,网络侧设备为该无线承载配置了一组传输质量门限,该组传输质量门限中可以包括至少一个传输质量门限,例如,可以包括3个传输质量门限,该组传输质量门限与该无线承载的所有逻辑信道对应。也就是说,网络侧设备为该无线承载配置了4个逻辑信道,该4个逻辑信道共用一组传输质量门限。这种情况,也可以称为网络侧设备采用per RB方式配置传输质量门限。不同无线承载可以独立配置传输质量门限。As an example, the network side device configures a set of transmission quality thresholds for the radio bearer. The set of transmission quality thresholds may include at least one transmission quality threshold. For example, it may include 3 transmission quality thresholds. All logical channels of the radio bearer correspond. That is, the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, and the 4 logical channels share a set of transmission quality thresholds. In this case, it can also be said that the network side device uses the per RB method to configure the transmission quality threshold. Different radio bearers can independently configure the transmission quality threshold.
作为另一种示例,网络侧设备为该终端侧设备配置了一组传输质量门限,该组传输质量门限中可以包括至少一个传输质量门限,例如,可以包括3个传输质量门限,该组传输质量门限与该终端侧设备所包括的所有的无线承载对应。也就是说,终端侧设备的多个无线承载共用一组传输质量门限。这种情况,也可以称为网络侧设备采用per UE方式配置传输质量门限。As another example, the network side device configures a set of transmission quality thresholds for the terminal side device. The set of transmission quality thresholds may include at least one transmission quality threshold. For example, it may include 3 transmission quality thresholds. The threshold corresponds to all radio bearers included in the terminal-side device. That is, multiple radio bearers of the terminal-side device share a set of transmission quality thresholds. In this case, it can also be said that the network side device uses the per UE mode to configure the transmission quality threshold.
第三种情况:The third situation:
所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限与所述主逻辑信道关联。The at least two logical channels include a main logical channel and at least one auxiliary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is associated with the main logical channel.
具体来讲,当网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载配置了主逻辑信道和辅逻辑信道,则网络侧设备可以只针对主逻辑信道配置对应的传输质量门限。例如,为主逻辑信道配置3个传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3。Specifically, when the network-side device configures the primary logical channel and the secondary logical channel for the radio bearer of the terminal-side device, the network-side device may configure the corresponding transmission quality threshold only for the primary logical channel. For example, configure 3 transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3.
第四种情况:The fourth situation:
所述至少两个逻辑信道的数量为K个,所述至少一个传输质量门限分为K组,所述K个逻辑信道与所述K组传输质量门限一一对应,K为大于或等于2的整数。在这种情况下,网络侧设备会给每一个逻辑信道配置一组传输质量门限,例如,网络侧设备为该无线承载配置了4个逻辑信道,则网络侧设备为该无线承载配置4组传输质量门限,每一组传输质量门限中包括3个传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3。这种情况,也可以称为网络侧设备采用per leg方式配置传输质量门限。The number of the at least two logical channels is K, the at least one transmission quality threshold is divided into K groups, the K logical channels are in one-to-one correspondence with the K groups of transmission quality thresholds, and K is greater than or equal to 2. Integer. In this case, the network side device will configure a set of transmission quality thresholds for each logical channel. For example, if the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, the network side device configures 4 sets of transmission for the radio bearer Quality thresholds, each group of transmission quality thresholds includes 3 transmission quality thresholds, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3. In this case, it can also be said that the network-side device uses the per leg method to configure the transmission quality threshold.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,一组传输质量门限中包括的传输质量门限的数量,可以与网络侧设备为无线承载配置的逻辑信道的数量相关联。作为一示例,网络侧设备为无线承载配置了4个逻辑信道,则网络侧设备在一组传输质量门限中可以设置3个传输质量门限,例如,针对主逻辑信道配置一组第一传输质量门限,则该组第一传输质量门限中 包括3个传输质量门限。作为另一种示例,网络侧设备为无线承载配置了3个逻辑信道,则网络侧设备在一组传输质量门限中可以设置2个传输质量门限,例如,针对主逻辑信道配置一组第一传输质量门限,则该组第一传输质量门限中包括2个传输质量门限。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the number of transmission quality thresholds included in a set of transmission quality thresholds may be related to the number of logical channels configured by the network side device for the radio bearer. As an example, the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer, then the network side device can set 3 transmission quality thresholds in a set of transmission quality thresholds, for example, configure a set of first transmission quality thresholds for the main logical channel , Then the group of first transmission quality thresholds includes 3 transmission quality thresholds. As another example, if the network side device configures 3 logical channels for the radio bearer, the network side device can set 2 transmission quality thresholds in a set of transmission quality thresholds, for example, configure a set of first transmissions for the main logical channel Quality threshold, the first transmission quality threshold of the group includes 2 transmission quality thresholds.
另外,当网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载配置了多个传输质量门限,且多个传输质量门限与逻辑信道之间有对应关系,例如,第一组传输质量门限对应主逻辑信道,第二组传输质量门限对应第一个辅逻辑信道,等等,则网络侧设备还可以在第一指示中携带传输质量门限与逻辑信道之间的对应关系,具体方式在此不作限制。In addition, when the network side device configures multiple transmission quality thresholds for the radio bearer of the terminal side device, and there is a correspondence between the multiple transmission quality thresholds and logical channels, for example, the first set of transmission quality thresholds corresponds to the primary logical channel, The two sets of transmission quality thresholds correspond to the first secondary logical channel, and so on, the network side device may also carry the correspondence between the transmission quality threshold and the logical channel in the first indication, and the specific manner is not limited here.
S406、终端侧设备根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。S406: The terminal-side device determines a logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
在本申请实施例中,终端侧设备可以根据各个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量之间的比较结果,来确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal-side device may determine the logical channel used for data transmission according to the comparison result between the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
下面,针对步骤S405中网络侧设备设置的传输质量门限的不同情况,分别对终端侧设备确定用户数据传输的逻辑信道的过程进行说明。为方便说明,下文中,将以网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载X配置了4个逻辑信道,且,网络侧设备配置的一组传输质量门限中包括3个传输质量门限为例。In the following, in view of different situations of the transmission quality threshold set by the network side device in step S405, the process of the terminal side device determining the logical channel for user data transmission will be described respectively. For convenience of explanation, in the following, the radio bearer X of the terminal side device is configured with 4 logical channels by the network side device as an example, and a set of transmission quality thresholds configured by the network side device includes 3 transmission quality thresholds as an example.
第一种确定方式:The first way to determine:
针对步骤S405中的第一种情况,所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和3个辅逻辑信道,且所述至少一个传输质量门限包括与主逻辑信道对应的3个第一传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3,以及与所有的辅逻辑信道对应的3个第二传输质量门限,分别标记为T1’、T2’和T3’。其中,T1可以理解为,将与主逻辑信道对应的多个第一传输质量门限从小到大排序后的第一个第一传输质量门限(或者最大的门限值),T2则可以理解为,将与主逻辑信道对应的多个第一传输质量门限从小到大排序后的第二个门限值,T3的含义也可以以此类推。T1’可以理解为,将与辅逻辑信道对应的多个第二传输质量门限从小到大排序后的第一个第二传输质量门限(或者最大的门限值),T2’和T3’的含义也可以以此类推,在此不再赘述。For the first case in step S405, the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and three secondary logical channels, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes three first transmissions corresponding to the primary logical channel. The quality thresholds are marked as T1, T2, and T3, and the three second transmission quality thresholds corresponding to all secondary logical channels are marked as T1', T2', and T3', respectively. Among them, T1 can be understood as the first first transmission quality threshold (or the maximum threshold) after sorting the multiple first transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the main logical channel from small to large, and T2 can be understood as, The second threshold after sorting the multiple first transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the main logical channel from small to large, the meaning of T3 can also be deduced by analogy. T1' can be understood as the first second transmission quality threshold (or the maximum threshold) after sorting the multiple second transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the secondary logical channel from small to large, the meaning of T2' and T3' It can be deduced by analogy, so I won't repeat it here.
若终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,则终端侧设备确定该主逻辑信道用于数据传输;If the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that the primary logical channel is used for data transmission;
否则,若终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2,且3个辅逻辑信道中的至少一个第一辅逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2’,则终端侧设备确定该主逻辑信道以及该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中的一个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,确定用于数据传输的一个辅逻辑信道可以是该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中上行数据传输质量最好的辅逻辑信道,或者,也可以是从该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中随机确定的一个辅逻辑信道,或者,由终端侧设备自行选择的一个逻辑信道,在此不作限制。Otherwise, if the terminal side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T2, and the uplink data transmission quality of at least one of the three secondary logical channels is greater than or equal to T2', the terminal side equipment Determine that the primary logical channel and one of the at least one first secondary logical channel are used for data transmission. Wherein, one secondary logical channel determined to be used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality among the at least one first secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly selected from the at least one first secondary logical channel. A determined secondary logical channel, or a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, is not limited here.
否则,若至少一个辅逻辑信道中的至少一个第二辅逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1’,则终端侧设备确定该主逻辑信道以及该至少一个第二辅逻辑信道中的一个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,确定用于数据传输的一个辅逻辑信道可以是该至少一个第二辅逻辑信道中上行数据传输质量最好的辅逻辑信道,或者,也可以是从该至少一个第二辅逻辑信道中随机确定的一个辅逻辑信道,或者,由终端侧设备自行选择的一个逻辑信道,在此不作限制。Otherwise, if the uplink data transmission quality of the at least one second auxiliary logical channel in the at least one auxiliary logical channel is greater than or equal to T1', the terminal-side device determines the main logical channel and one of the at least one second auxiliary logical channel. Logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, one secondary logical channel determined to be used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one second secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly selected from the at least one second secondary logical channel. A determined secondary logical channel, or a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, is not limited here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3,且3个辅逻 辑信道中的至少两个第三辅逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3’,则终端侧设备确定该主逻辑信道以及该至少两个第三辅逻辑信道中的两个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该两个辅逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T3, and the uplink data transmission quality of at least two of the three secondary logical channels is greater than or equal to T3', the terminal side The device determines that the primary logical channel and two of the at least two third secondary logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, the method for selecting the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定该3个辅逻辑信道中的至少两个第四辅逻辑信道的数据传输质量大于或等于T2’,则终端侧设备确定该主逻辑信道以及该至少两个第四辅逻辑信道中的两个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该两个辅逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the data transmission quality of at least two of the three secondary logical channels is greater than or equal to T2', the terminal-side device determines the primary logical channel and the at least two fourth secondary logical channels Two of the logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, the method for selecting the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定该4个逻辑信道不满足前述所有的情况,则终端侧设备确定所有的逻辑信道用于数据传输。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
第二种确定方式:The second way to determine:
针对步骤S405中的第二种情况,所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和3个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限适用于每一个逻辑信道,该至少一个传输质量门限包括3个传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3。其中,T1、T2和T3也可以采用第一种确定方式中的理解方式,在此不再赘述。For the second case in step S405, the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and three secondary logical channels, the at least one transmission quality threshold is applicable to each logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold Includes 3 transmission quality thresholds, marked as T1, T2, and T3. Among them, T1, T2, and T3 can also adopt the understanding mode in the first determination mode, which will not be repeated here.
若终端侧设备确定至少两个逻辑信道中至少一个第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,且该至少一个第一逻辑信道中包括主逻辑信道,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel of the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T1, and the at least one first logical channel includes the primary logical channel, the terminal-side device determines that the primary logical channel is used For data transmission.
否则,若终端侧设备确定至少两个逻辑信道中至少一个第二逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,且该至少一个第二逻辑信道中不包括主逻辑信道,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道及该至少一个第二逻辑信道中的一个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,确定用于数据传输的一个辅逻辑信道可以是该至少一个第二辅逻辑信道中上行数据传输质量最好的辅逻辑信道,或者,也可以是从该至少一个第二辅逻辑信道中随机确定的一个辅逻辑信道,或者,由终端侧设备自行选择的一个逻辑信道,在此不作限制。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one second logical channel of the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T1, and the at least one second logical channel does not include the main logical channel, the terminal-side device determines the main The logical channel and one of the at least one second logical channel are used for data transmission. Wherein, one secondary logical channel determined to be used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one second secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly selected from the at least one second secondary logical channel. A determined secondary logical channel, or a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, is not limited here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定至少两个逻辑信道中至少两个第三逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2,且至少两个第三辅逻辑信道中包括主逻辑信道,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道及该至少两个第三逻辑信道中的一个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该辅逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least two third logical channels in the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, and the primary logical channel is included in the at least two third secondary logical channels, the terminal-side device determines The primary logical channel and one of the at least two third logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, the selection method of the secondary logical channel is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定至少两个逻辑信道中至少两个第四逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2,且至少两个第四辅逻辑信道中不包括主逻辑信道,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道及该至少两个第四逻辑信道中的两个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该两个辅逻辑信道的选择与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least two fourth logical channels in the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, and the primary logical channel is not included in the at least two fourth secondary logical channels, the terminal-side device Determine that the primary logical channel and the two secondary logical channels of the at least two fourth logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, the selection of the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若至少两个逻辑信道的数量大于或等于3,终端侧设备确定至少三个第五逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3,且该至少三个第五逻辑信道中包括主逻辑信道,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道及至少三个第五逻辑信道中的两个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该两个辅逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the number of at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to 3, the terminal side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least three fifth logical channels is greater than or equal to T3, and the at least three fifth logical channels include the primary logical channel , The terminal-side device determines that two of the primary logical channel and at least three fifth logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, the method for selecting the two auxiliary logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若至少两个逻辑信道包括至少三个逻辑信道,终端侧设备确定至少三个第六逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3,且该至少三个第六逻辑信道中不包括主逻辑信道,则终端侧设备确定所有的逻辑信道用于数据传输。Otherwise, if the at least two logical channels include at least three logical channels, the terminal device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the at least three sixth logical channels is greater than or equal to T3, and the at least three sixth logical channels do not include the main logical channel Channel, the terminal side device determines all logical channels for data transmission.
否则,若终端侧设备确定该4个逻辑信道不满足前述所有的情况,则终端侧设备确定所有的逻辑信道用于数据传输。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
第三种确定方式:The third way to determine:
针对步骤S405中的第二种情况,所述至少一个传输质量门限适用于每一个逻辑信道,该至少一个传输质量门限包括3个传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3,且网络侧设备未配置主逻辑信道。其中,T1、T2和T3也可以采用第一种确定方式中的理解方式,在此不再赘述。For the second case in step S405, the at least one transmission quality threshold is applicable to each logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes three transmission quality thresholds, which are marked as T1, T2, and T3, and the network side device The primary logical channel is not configured. Among them, T1, T2, and T3 can also adopt the understanding mode in the first determination mode, which will not be repeated here.
若终端侧设备确定至少一个第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,则终端侧设备确定该至少一个第一逻辑信道中的一个第一逻辑信道用于数据传输,其中,用于数据传输的第一逻辑信道可以是该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中上行数据传输质量最好的辅逻辑信道,或者,也可以是从该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中随机确定的一个辅逻辑信道,或者,由终端侧设备自行选择的一个逻辑信道,在此不作限制。If the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that one of the at least one first logical channel is used for data transmission, where The first logical channel to be transmitted may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one first secondary logical channel, or it may be a secondary logical channel randomly determined from the at least one first secondary logical channel , Or, a logical channel selected by the terminal-side device itself, and there is no restriction here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定至少两个第二逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2,则终端侧设备确定该至少两个第二逻辑信道中的两个第二逻辑信道用于数据传输,其中,该两个第二逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least two second logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal-side device determines that two of the at least two second logical channels are used for data transmission, Wherein, the method for selecting the two second logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若至少两个逻辑信道的数量大于或等于3,终端侧设备确定至少三个第三逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3,则终端侧设备确定该至少三个第三逻辑信道中的三个第三逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该三个第三逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the number of at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to 3, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least three third logical channels is greater than or equal to T3, the terminal-side device determines that among the at least three third logical channels The three third logical channels are used for data transmission. Wherein, the selection method of the three third logical channels is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定该4个逻辑信道不满足前述所有的情况,则终端侧设备确定所有的逻辑信道用于数据传输。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
第四种确定方式:The fourth way to determine:
针对步骤S405中的第三种情况,所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限与主逻辑信道对应,该至少一个传输质量门限包括3个传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3,其中,T1、T2和T3也可以采用第一种确定方式中的理解方式,在此不再赘述。For the third situation in step S405, the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, the at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to the primary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes The three transmission quality thresholds are marked as T1, T2, and T3, respectively. Among them, T1, T2, and T3 can also adopt the understanding method in the first determination method, which will not be repeated here.
若终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道用于数据传输;If the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that the primary logical channel is used for data transmission;
否则,若终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道及至少一个辅逻辑信道中的一个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输,其中,该用于数据传输的辅逻辑信道可以是随机选择的或者也可以是至少一个辅逻辑信道中上行数据传输质量最好的,或者,由终端侧设备自行选择的一个逻辑信道,在此不作限制。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal-side device determines that one of the primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel is used for data transmission. The secondary logical channel for data transmission may be randomly selected or at least one of the secondary logical channels with the best uplink data transmission quality, or a logical channel selected by the terminal side device itself, which is not limited here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3,则终端侧设备确定主逻辑信道及至少一个辅逻辑信道中的两个辅逻辑信道用于数据传输,其中,该用于数据传输的两个辅逻辑信道的选择方式与前述相似,在此不再赘述。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of the primary logical channel is greater than or equal to T3, the terminal-side device determines that two of the primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel are used for data transmission. The method for selecting the two secondary logical channels for data transmission is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
否则,若终端侧设备确定该4个逻辑信道不满足前述所有的情况,则终端侧设备确定所有的逻辑信道用于数据传输。Otherwise, if the terminal-side device determines that the 4 logical channels do not meet all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels are used for data transmission.
第五种确定方式:The fifth way to determine:
针对步骤S405中的第四种情况,与前述第二种确定方式和第三种确定方式相似,在此不再赘述。Regarding the fourth situation in step S405, it is similar to the foregoing second determining method and third determining method, and will not be repeated here.
与第二种确定方式或第三种确定方式不同的是,由于每个逻辑信道都对应一组传输质量门限,因此,终端侧设备在确定某一个逻辑信道是否满足上述其中一个条件时,需要使 用与该逻辑信道对应的传输质量门限。例如,在第二种确定方式中,终端侧设备确定至少两个逻辑信道中至少一个第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1时,只需要将每一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量与T1进行比较即可。然而,在第五种确定方式中,终端侧设备确定至少一个第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1时,需要确定第一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量是否大于或等于与该第一个逻辑信道对应的一组传输质量门限中的T1,第二个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量是否大于或等于与该第二个逻辑信道对应的一组传输质量门限中的T1,直到遍历每一个逻辑信道,然后才能确定是否有至少一个第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1。其他相应的内容请参照前述描述,在此不再赘述。Different from the second method or the third method, since each logical channel corresponds to a set of transmission quality thresholds, the terminal device needs to use it when determining whether a logical channel meets one of the above conditions. The transmission quality threshold corresponding to the logical channel. For example, in the second determination method, when the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one of the at least two logical channels is greater than or equal to T1, it only needs to compare the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel with T1 can be compared. However, in the fifth determination method, when the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or equal to T1, it needs to determine whether the uplink data transmission quality of the first logical channel is greater than or equal to that of the first logical channel. T1 in a set of transmission quality thresholds corresponding to a logical channel, whether the uplink data transmission quality of the second logical channel is greater than or equal to T1 in a set of transmission quality thresholds corresponding to the second logical channel, until every traverse Only after a logical channel can it be determined whether the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel is greater than or equal to T1. For other corresponding content, please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
S407、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送第二指示,网络侧设备接收该第二指示。S407. The terminal side device sends a second instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the second instruction.
在本申请实施例中,该第二指示包括该无线承载的标识以及比特序列,该比特序列用于指示所述至少两个逻辑信道中所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道。In the embodiment of the present application, the second indication includes an identifier of the radio bearer and a bit sequence, and the bit sequence is used to indicate the logical channel used for data transmission among the at least two logical channels.
在终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道后,可以向网络侧设备发送指示该用于数据传输的逻辑信道。该第二指示可以是MAC CE信令,或者RRC信令,或者也可以是其他信令,在此不作限制。After the terminal side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission, it may send an indication of the logical channel used for data transmission to the network side device. The second indication may be MAC CE signaling, or RRC signaling, or may also be other signaling, which is not limited here.
作为一种示例,请参考图6,为第二指示的一种示意图。如图6所示,该第二指示包括8个比特(b7~b0),前4个比特(b7~b4)用于指示该无线承载X的标识,例如,索引号或者ID等。例如,该无线承载X的标识为1101,则b7~b4的取值依次为“1101”。后4个比特(b3~b0)用于指示无线承载X的多个逻辑信道是否用于数据传输。例如,b3用于指示第一个逻辑信道(即LCH1)是否用于数据传输,b2用于指示第二个逻辑信道(即LCH2)是否用于数据传输,b3用于指示第三个逻辑信道(即LCH3)是否用于数据传输以及b4用于指示第四个逻辑信道(即LCH4)是否用于数据传输。若终端侧确定LCH1和LCH3用于数据传输,则b3~b0的取值依次为“1010”。其中,该b3~b0中任意一个比特的取值为1时,则表示与该比特对应的逻辑信道用于数据传输,否则该逻辑信道不用于数据传输。As an example, please refer to FIG. 6, which is a schematic diagram of the second indication. As shown in FIG. 6, the second indication includes 8 bits (b7 to b0), and the first 4 bits (b7 to b4) are used to indicate the identity of the radio bearer X, for example, an index number or ID. For example, if the identifier of the radio bearer X is 1101, the values of b7 to b4 are "1101" in order. The last 4 bits (b3 ~ b0) are used to indicate whether multiple logical channels of the radio bearer X are used for data transmission. For example, b3 is used to indicate whether the first logical channel (ie LCH1) is used for data transmission, b2 is used to indicate whether the second logical channel (ie LCH2) is used for data transmission, and b3 is used to indicate the third logical channel ( That is, whether LCH3) is used for data transmission and b4 is used to indicate whether the fourth logical channel (ie, LCH4) is used for data transmission. If the terminal side determines that LCH1 and LCH3 are used for data transmission, the values of b3 to b0 are sequentially "1010". Wherein, when the value of any one of the bits b3 to b0 is 1, it indicates that the logical channel corresponding to the bit is used for data transmission, otherwise the logical channel is not used for data transmission.
需要说明的是,若该无线承载X配置了如图3B所示的架构,则终端侧设备可以向主网络侧设备和辅网络侧设备分别发送该第二指示,或者,若只有一个网络侧设备所管理的逻辑信道用于数据传输,则终端侧设备也可以只向该网络侧设备发送第二指示。It should be noted that if the radio bearer X is configured with the architecture shown in FIG. 3B, the terminal side device can send the second instruction to the primary network side device and the secondary network side device respectively, or if there is only one network side device The managed logical channel is used for data transmission, and the terminal-side device may also only send the second instruction to the network-side device.
需要说明的是,步骤S407为可选步骤,即不是必须要执行的。在图4中,步骤S407以虚线表示该步骤是可选的步骤。It should be noted that step S407 is an optional step, that is, it is not necessary to be performed. In FIG. 4, step S407 uses a dotted line to indicate that this step is optional.
S408、在用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1的情况下,终端侧设备在该用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行重复传输。S408: When the number of logical channels used for data transmission is greater than 1, the terminal-side device performs repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission.
当用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量等于1时,则终端设备的PDCP层不会对数据包进行复制,而是直接将数据包发送到用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行传输。在这种情况下,可以理解为,终端侧设备不进行重复传输。When the number of logical channels used for data transmission is equal to 1, the PDCP layer of the terminal device does not copy the data packet, but directly sends the data packet to the logical channel used for data transmission for transmission. In this case, it can be understood that the terminal side device does not perform repeated transmission.
需要说明的是,终端侧设备在用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行重复传输,是指该确定的用于数据传输的逻辑信道上发送重复的数据包,但是不影响在其他逻辑信道上发送不重复的数据包。例如,终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道为LCH1和LCH2,则终端侧设备可以在LCH1和LCH2上发送数据包1,且,终端侧设备可以在LCH3或者LCH4上发送与数据包1不同的数据包2;可选的,终端侧设备的PDCP实体也可以不向LCH3和LCH4上发送新的数据包。It should be noted that the repeated transmission of the terminal-side device on the logical channel used for data transmission means that repeated data packets are sent on the determined logical channel for data transmission, but it does not affect the transmission failure on other logical channels. Duplicate packets. For example, if the terminal-side device determines that the logical channels used for data transmission are LCH1 and LCH2, the terminal-side device can send data packet 1 on LCH1 and LCH2, and the terminal-side device can send data packet 1 on LCH3 or LCH4 different from data packet 1.的数据包2; Optionally, the PDCP entity of the terminal side device may not send new data packets to LCH3 and LCH4.
另外,需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不限制各个步骤的执行顺序,例如,步骤S407和步骤S408可以同时执行,或者,可以先执行步骤S408再执行步骤S407等。图4中的执行顺序仅为一种示例,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限制。In addition, it should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the execution order of each step is not limited. For example, step S407 and step S408 can be performed at the same time, or step S408 can be performed first and then step S407, etc. The execution sequence in FIG. 4 is only an example, and should not be understood as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
在上述技术方案中,终端侧设备首先通过无线承载的每个逻辑信道的下行数据传输质量估算每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,然后根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,这样,当每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量较好时,则终端侧设备可以只选用其中的一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输,从而在空口侧一个数据包只进行少数几次重复传输,从而可以避免资源浪费。且,当每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量较差时,终端侧设备可以使用所有的逻辑信道进行重复传输,以保证传输质量,从而可以实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。In the above technical solution, the terminal-side device first estimates the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel based on the downlink data transmission quality of each logical channel carried by the radio, and then determines the data transmission quality according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel In this way, when the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is good, the terminal-side device can only select some of the logical channels for repeated transmission, so that a data packet on the air interface side is only retransmitted a few times , Thereby avoiding waste of resources. Moreover, when the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is poor, the terminal-side device can use all the logical channels for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission quality, thereby achieving a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization.
进一步,相较于由网络侧设备通过感知信道质量变化然后控制逻辑信道是否用于数据传输的方式,由于网络侧设备生成指示信息,指示数据传输以及重传,以及终端侧处理该指示信息均需要一定的时长,而由终端侧设备来确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道可以节省前述过程所需的时长,因此,可以更快地响应信道条件的变化。Further, compared to the way that the network side device senses the channel quality change and then controls whether the logical channel is used for data transmission, the network side device generates instruction information, instructs data transmission and retransmission, and the terminal side processes the instruction information. For a certain period of time, the determination of the logical channel for data transmission by the terminal-side device can save the time required for the foregoing process, and therefore, it can respond to changes in channel conditions more quickly.
在图4所示的实施例中,是由终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。然而,网络侧设备也可以通过信令控制用于数据传输的逻辑信道。下面,将介绍在网络侧设备通过信令控制用于数据传输的逻辑信道的情况下,终端侧设备进行数据传输的过程。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the logical channel used for data transmission is determined by the terminal-side device. However, the network side device can also control the logical channel used for data transmission through signaling. In the following, the process of data transmission by the terminal-side device when the network-side device controls the logical channel for data transmission through signaling will be introduced.
请参考图7,本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图。Please refer to FIG. 7, a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
S701、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送能力指示信息,网络侧设备接收该能力指示信息。S701. The terminal side device sends capability indication information to the network side device, and the network side device receives the capability indication information.
S702、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第一配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第一配置信令。S702: The network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
S703、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第二配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第二配置信令。S703: The network side device sends second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
步骤S701~步骤S703与步骤S401~步骤S403相似,在此不再赘述。Steps S701 to S703 are similar to steps S401 to S403, and will not be repeated here.
S704、网络侧设备发送第三指示,终端侧设备接收该第三指示。S704. The network side device sends a third instruction, and the terminal side device receives the third instruction.
在本申请实施例中,该第三指示用于指示终端侧设备至少使用为该无线承载配置的至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输。该第三指示可以为MAC CE信令或者RRC信令等。In the embodiment of the present application, the third indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at least the first part of the logical channels of the at least two logical channels configured for the radio bearer for repeated transmission. The third indication may be MAC CE signaling or RRC signaling.
作为一种示例,该第三指示用于指示终端侧设备使用LCH1和LCH2进行重复传输。As an example, the third indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use LCH1 and LCH2 for repeated transmission.
S705、终端侧设备获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量。S705. The terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel of the at least two logical channels.
S706、网络侧设备发送第一指示,终端侧设备接收该第一指示。S706: The network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device receives the first instruction.
步骤S705~步骤S706与步骤S404~步骤S405相同,在此不再赘述。Steps S705 to S706 are the same as steps S404 to S405, and will not be repeated here.
S707、终端侧设备根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。S707. The terminal-side device determines a logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
在本申请实施例中,网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载配置的多个逻辑信道可以分为两个部分,第一部分逻辑信道为网络侧设备发送的第三指示中指示的逻辑信道,例如,第一部分逻辑信道包括LCH1和LCH2。第二部分为该多个逻辑信道中除该第三指示中指示的用于数据传输/复制数据传输的逻辑信道之外的逻辑信道,例如第二部分逻辑信道包括LCH3和LCH4。终端侧设备在确定该多个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量后,则根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定该第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道。也就是说,终端侧设备只能激活第二部分逻辑信道用于重复传输,但不能去激活第一部分逻辑信道,或者,可以理解为,终端侧设备至少使用第一部分逻辑信道进行 重复传输。In the embodiment of the present application, the multiple logical channels configured by the network side device for the radio bearer of the terminal side device can be divided into two parts. The first part of the logical channel is the logical channel indicated in the third instruction sent by the network side device, for example , The first part of logical channels includes LCH1 and LCH2. The second part is a logical channel of the plurality of logical channels other than the logical channel for data transmission/replication data transmission indicated in the third instruction. For example, the second part of logical channels includes LCH3 and LCH4. After determining the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel among the multiple logical channels, the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. In other words, the terminal-side device can only activate the second part of the logical channels for repeated transmission, but cannot deactivate the first part of the logical channels, or it can be understood that the terminal-side device uses at least the first part of the logical channels for repeated transmission.
作为一种示例,请参考图8,网络侧设备通过MAC CE(第三指示)指示LCH1和LCH2用于duplication传输。当终端侧设备确定LCH1和LCH2无法保证该无线承载的服务质量,例如,LCH1和LCH2的上行数据传输质量均较差,则终端侧设备可以根据LCH3的上行数据传输质量和LCH4的上行数据传输质量,确定LCH3和/或LCH4是否用于数据传输。例如,终端侧设备确定LCH3用于数据传输,从而用于duplication传输的逻辑信道由LCH1和LCH2变成LCH1~LCH3。在图8中用虚线表示不用于duplication传输的逻辑信道。As an example, please refer to Figure 8. The network-side device instructs LCH1 and LCH2 to be used for duplication transmission through MAC CE (third indication). When the terminal-side device determines that LCH1 and LCH2 cannot guarantee the quality of service of the radio bearer, for example, the uplink data transmission quality of LCH1 and LCH2 are both poor, the terminal-side device can base on the uplink data transmission quality of LCH3 and the uplink data transmission quality of LCH4 To determine whether LCH3 and/or LCH4 are used for data transmission. For example, the terminal side device determines that LCH3 is used for data transmission, so that the logical channels used for duplication transmission are changed from LCH1 and LCH2 to LCH1 to LCH3. In Figure 8, the dashed lines indicate logical channels not used for duplication transmission.
或者,终端侧设备可以按照预设的周期,周期性执行步骤S707,从而确定是否需要增加用于数据传输的逻辑信道。Alternatively, the terminal-side device may periodically perform step S707 according to a preset cycle, so as to determine whether it is necessary to add a logical channel for data transmission.
终端侧设备确定第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的方式可以包括但不限于如下两种方式。The manner in which the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel may include but is not limited to the following two methods.
第一种确定方式,与步骤S406中的方式相似,在此不再赘述。The first determination method is similar to the method in step S406, and will not be repeated here.
第二种确定方式,终端侧设备可以根据第三指示所指示的用于duplication传输的逻辑信道(或者可以称为,第三指示激活的逻辑信道)的数量,以及每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道。In the second way of determining, the terminal-side device can use the number of logical channels (or can be referred to as the logical channels activated by the third indication) indicated by the third indication for duplication transmission, and the uplink data transmission of each logical channel Quality determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second part of the logical channel.
作为一种示例,网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载配置了4个逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限适用于每一个逻辑信道,该至少一个传输质量门限包括3个传输质量门限,分别标记为T1、T2和T3。As an example, the network side device configures 4 logical channels for the radio bearer of the terminal side device, the at least one transmission quality threshold is applicable to each logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes 3 transmission quality thresholds, respectively Labeled as T1, T2, and T3.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为3,且,终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量均小于T3,则终端侧设备确定第二部分逻辑信道中的所有逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the number of logical channels in the first part is 3, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first part of logical channels is less than T3, the terminal-side device determines all the logical channels in the second part of logical channels The channel is used for data transmission.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为2,且终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量小于T2,以及,第二部分逻辑信道的至少一个第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,则终端侧设备确定至少一个第一逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道用于数据传输。其中,该用于数据传输的一个逻辑信道可以是该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中上行数据传输质量最好的辅逻辑信道,或者,也可以是从该至少一个第一辅逻辑信道中随机确定的一个辅逻辑信道,在此不作限制。If the number of the first partial logical channel is 2, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T2, and the uplink data transmission quality of at least one first logical channel in the second partial logical channel If the data transmission quality is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal-side device determines that one of the at least one first logical channel is used for data transmission. Wherein, the one logical channel used for data transmission may be the secondary logical channel with the best uplink data transmission quality in the at least one first secondary logical channel, or it may be randomly determined from the at least one first secondary logical channel One of the secondary logical channels is not limited here.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为2,且终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量小于T2,以及,第一部分逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道和第二部分逻辑信道中的至少一个第二逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量均大于或等于T2,则终端侧设备确定至少一个第二逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the number of logical channels in the first part is 2, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first part of logical channels is less than T2, and one logical channel in the first part of logical channels and the second part of logical channels If the uplink data transmission quality of at least one second logical channel in the channels is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal side device determines that one logical channel of the at least one second logical channel is used for data transmission.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为1,且终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量小于T1,以及,第二部分逻辑信道中的至少一个第三逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T1,则终端侧设备确定该至少一个第三逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the number of the first partial logical channel is 1, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T1, and the transmission quality of at least one third logical channel in the second partial logical channel If the uplink data transmission quality is greater than or equal to T1, the terminal side device determines that one of the at least one third logical channel is used for data transmission.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为1,且终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量小于T1,且,该第一部分逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道以及第二部分逻辑信道中的至少一个第四逻辑信道的数据传输质量大于或等于T2,则终端侧设备确定至少一个第四逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the number of logical channels in the first part is 1, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first part of logical channels is less than T1, and one logical channel and the second part of the first part of logical channels If the data transmission quality of at least one fourth logical channel in the logical channels is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal side device determines that one logical channel in the at least one fourth logical channel is used for data transmission.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为1,且终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一 个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量小于T1,且,第二部分逻辑信道中的至少两个第五逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T2,则终端侧设备确定至少两个第五逻辑信道中两个逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the number of the first partial logical channel is 1, and the terminal side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T1, and at least two fifth logical channels in the second partial logical channel If the uplink data transmission quality of is greater than or equal to T2, the terminal side device determines that two logical channels of the at least two fifth logical channels are used for data transmission.
若第一部分逻辑信道的数量为1,且终端侧设备确定该第一部分逻辑信道中的至少一个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量小于T1,且,该第一部分逻辑信道中的一个逻辑信道的以及第二部分逻辑信道中的至少两个第六逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量大于或等于T3,则终端侧设备确定至少两个第六逻辑信道中两个逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the number of the first partial logical channel is 1, and the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of at least one logical channel in the first partial logical channel is less than T1, and the second partial logical channel is If the uplink data transmission quality of at least two sixth logical channels in the partial logical channels is greater than or equal to T3, the terminal side device determines that two logical channels of the at least two sixth logical channels are used for data transmission.
若终端侧设备确定该4个逻辑信道不满足前述所有的情况,则终端侧设备确定第二部分逻辑信道中的所有的逻辑信道用于数据传输。If the terminal-side device determines that the four logical channels do not satisfy all the foregoing conditions, the terminal-side device determines that all logical channels in the second part of the logical channels are used for data transmission.
S708、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送第二指示,网络侧设备接收该第二指示。S708: The terminal-side device sends a second instruction to the network-side device, and the network-side device receives the second instruction.
S709、终端侧设备使用第一部分逻辑信道和第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道进行重复传输。S709. The terminal-side device uses the logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel to perform repeated transmission.
作为一种示例,当终端侧设备确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道为LCH3,则终端侧设备在LCH1~LCH3上进行重复传输。As an example, when the terminal-side device determines that the logical channel used for data transmission is LCH3, the terminal-side device performs repeated transmission on LCH1 to LCH3.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不限制各个步骤的执行顺序,图7中的执行顺序仅为一种示例,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限制。It should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, the execution order of each step is not limited. The execution order in FIG. 7 is only an example and should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
在上述技术方案中,终端侧设备可以根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定是否增加额外的逻辑信道进行重复传输,可以避免由于网络侧设备激活的逻辑信道的传输质量变差导致无法保证数据传输的可靠性的问题。In the above technical solution, the terminal-side device can determine whether to add additional logical channels for repeated transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, which can avoid the inability to guarantee due to the deterioration of the transmission quality of the logical channel activated by the network-side device The reliability of data transmission.
请参考图9,本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图。Please refer to FIG. 9, which is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
S901、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送能力指示信息,网络侧设备接收该能力指示信息。S901. The terminal side device sends capability indication information to the network side device, and the network side device receives the capability indication information.
S902、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第一配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第一配置信令。S902: The network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
S903、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第二配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第二配置信令。S903. The network side device sends the second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
步骤S901~步骤S903与步骤S401~步骤S403相似,在此不再赘述。Steps S901 to S903 are similar to steps S401 to S403, and will not be repeated here.
S904、网络侧设备发送第四指示,终端侧设备接收该第四指示。S904: The network side device sends a fourth instruction, and the terminal side device receives the fourth instruction.
在本申请实施例中,该第四指示用于指示终端侧设备至多使用该至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输。该第四指示可以为MAC CE信令或者RRC信令等。In the embodiment of the present application, the fourth indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at most the first part of the at least two logical channels for repeated transmission. The fourth indication may be MAC CE signaling or RRC signaling.
作为一种示例,该第四指示用于指示终端侧设备使用LCH1和LCH2进行重复传输。As an example, the fourth indication is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use LCH1 and LCH2 for repeated transmission.
S905、终端侧设备获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量。S905: The terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel of the at least two logical channels.
S906、网络侧设备发送第一指示,终端侧设备接收该第一指示。S906: The network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device receives the first instruction.
步骤S905~步骤S906与步骤S404~步骤S405相同,在此不再赘述。Step S905 to step S906 are the same as step S404 to step S405, and will not be repeated here.
S907、终端侧设备根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道。S907. The terminal-side device determines a logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel.
在本申请实施例中,网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载配置的多个逻辑信道可以分为两个部分,第一部分逻辑信道为网络侧设备发送的第四指示中指示的逻辑信道,例如,第一部分逻辑信道包括LCH1和LCH2。第二部分为该多个逻辑信道中除该第三指示中指示的逻辑信道之外的逻辑信道,例如第二部分逻辑信道包括LCH3和LCH4。终端侧设备根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定该第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道。也就是说,终端侧设备只能去激活第一部分逻辑信道用于重复传输,但不能激活第二部分逻辑信道,或者,可以理解为,终端侧设备至多使用第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传 输。In the embodiment of the present application, the multiple logical channels configured by the network side device for the radio bearer of the terminal side device can be divided into two parts. The first part of the logical channel is the logical channel indicated in the fourth instruction sent by the network side device, for example , The first part of logical channels includes LCH1 and LCH2. The second part is a logical channel of the plurality of logical channels other than the logical channel indicated in the third indication. For example, the second part of logical channels includes LCH3 and LCH4. The terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. In other words, the terminal-side device can only deactivate the first part of the logical channels for repeated transmission, but cannot activate the second part of the logical channels, or it can be understood that the terminal-side equipment uses the first part of the logical channels for repeated transmission at most.
作为一种示例,请参考图10,网络侧设备通过MAC CE(第四指示)指示LCH1和LCH2用于duplication传输。当终端侧设备确定LCH1和LCH2的上行数据传输质量均较好,则终端侧设备可以根据LCH1的上行数据传输质量和LCH2的上行数据传输质量,确定是否只用LCH1或LCH2进行数据传输。例如,终端侧设备确定LCH2用于数据传输,从而用于数据传输的逻辑信道由LCH1和LCH2变成LCH2。在图10中,用虚线表示该逻辑信道不用于数据传输。As an example, please refer to Figure 10, the network side device instructs LCH1 and LCH2 to be used for duplication transmission through MAC CE (fourth indication). When the terminal-side device determines that the uplink data transmission quality of LCH1 and LCH2 are both good, the terminal-side device can determine whether to use only LCH1 or LCH2 for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of LCH1 and the uplink data transmission quality of LCH2. For example, the terminal-side device determines that LCH2 is used for data transmission, so that the logical channel used for data transmission changes from LCH1 and LCH2 to LCH2. In Figure 10, the dashed line indicates that the logical channel is not used for data transmission.
需要说明的是,终端侧设备确定第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的方式,与步骤S707中相似,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the manner in which the terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel is similar to that in step S707, and will not be repeated here.
S908、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送第二指示,网络侧设备接收该第二指示。S908: The terminal side device sends a second instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the second instruction.
S909、终端侧设备使用第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道进行数据传输。S909: The terminal-side device uses the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel to perform data transmission.
当终端侧设备确定第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量为1,例如为LCH2,则终端侧设备在LCH2上进行数据传输,在这种情况下,不进行重复传输。When the terminal-side device determines that the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channels is 1, for example, LCH2, the terminal-side device performs data transmission on LCH2. In this case, repeated transmission is not performed.
当终端侧设备确定第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1时,终端侧设备在该第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行重复传输。When the terminal-side device determines that the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel is greater than 1, the terminal-side device performs repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不限制各个步骤的执行顺序,图9中的执行顺序仅为一种示例,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限制。It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, the execution order of each step is not limited. The execution order in FIG. 9 is only an example, and should not be understood as a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
在上述技术方案中,终端侧设备可以根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定是否去激活用于数据传输的逻辑信道,可以避免由于网络侧设备激活的逻辑信道的传输质量均较好时造成的资源浪费的问题。In the above technical solution, the terminal-side device can determine whether to deactivate the logical channel for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, which can avoid the time when the transmission quality of the logical channel activated by the network-side device is good. The problem of wasting resources.
在另一些实施例中,网络侧设备可以通过指示信息控制无线承载的逻辑信道是否用于数据传输,终端侧设备也可以前述方法修改逻辑信道是否用于数据传输的状态。例如,终端侧设备可以采用如前述图4~图10中任意一种方式选择去激活网络侧设备指示的用于数据传输的逻辑信道,也可以激活网络侧设备指示用于数据传输的逻辑信道之外的逻辑信道,也就是说,网络侧设备与终端侧设备可以独立地确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,从而可以增加数据传输过程的灵活性。具体实现过程与前述实施例相似,在此不再赘述。In other embodiments, the network side device can control whether the logical channel of the radio bearer is used for data transmission through the indication information, and the terminal side device can also modify the state of whether the logical channel is used for data transmission in the aforementioned method. For example, the terminal-side device can select and deactivate the logical channel indicated by the network-side device for data transmission by using any of the methods shown in Figs. 4-10, or it can activate one of the logical channels indicated by the network-side device for data transmission. The external logical channel, that is, the network side device and the terminal side device can independently determine the logical channel used for data transmission, so that the flexibility of the data transmission process can be increased. The specific implementation process is similar to the foregoing embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
在图4~图10所示的实施例中,终端侧设备根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,调整用于数据传输的逻辑信道,实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。而由前述实施例中的描述可知,每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量是通过该逻辑信道所关联的小区的信道质量来表示的,也就是说,调整用于数据传输的逻辑信道,其实质是在调整用于数据传输的小区。In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4 to 10, the terminal-side device adjusts the logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, so as to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization. From the description in the foregoing embodiment, it can be seen that the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel is represented by the channel quality of the cell associated with the logical channel. That is to say, adjusting the logical channel used for data transmission is essentially It is adjusting the cell used for data transmission.
下面,请参考图11,为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图。在图11所示的实施例中,通过终端侧设备调整小区与逻辑信道的映射关系的方式,实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。Hereinafter, please refer to FIG. 11, which is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided in an embodiment of this application. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the terminal side device adjusts the mapping relationship between the cell and the logical channel to achieve a balance between transmission quality and resource utilization.
S1101、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第一配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第一配置信令。S1101. The network side device sends the first configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the first configuration signaling.
S1102、网络侧设备向终端侧设备发送第二配置信令,终端侧设备接收该第二配置信令。S1102. The network side device sends the second configuration signaling to the terminal side device, and the terminal side device receives the second configuration signaling.
步骤S1101~步骤S1102与步骤S401~步骤S402相似,在此不再赘述。Steps S1101 to S1102 are similar to steps S401 to S402, and will not be repeated here.
作为一种示例,网络侧设备为终端侧设备的无线承载X配置2个逻辑信道,分别为 LCH1和LCH2,且,网络侧设备为LCH1配置的小区为CC1~CC3,为LCH2配置的小区为CC4~CC6。As an example, the network side device configures two logical channels for the radio bearer X of the terminal side device, namely LCH1 and LCH2, and the cell configured by the network side device for LCH1 is CC1 to CC3, and the cell configured for LCH2 is CC4 ~CC6.
需要说明的是,步骤S1102为可选步骤,即不是必须要执行的,也就是说,网络侧设备也可以不为无线承载的逻辑信道配置对应的小区。在图11中,以虚线表示该步骤为可选步骤。It should be noted that step S1102 is an optional step, that is, it is not necessary to be performed, that is, the network side device may not configure a corresponding cell for the logical channel of the radio bearer. In Figure 11, the dotted line indicates that this step is optional.
S1103、终端侧设备获取至少两个小区中每个小区的信道质量。S1103. The terminal-side device obtains the channel quality of each of the at least two cells.
步骤S1103与步骤S403中相应的内容相似,在此不再赘述。The corresponding content in step S1103 is similar to that in step S403, and will not be repeated here.
S1104、终端侧设备根据至少两个小区中每个小区的信道质量,确定至少两个逻辑信道与所述至少两个小区的第一映射关系。S1104. The terminal-side device determines a first mapping relationship between the at least two logical channels and the at least two cells according to the channel quality of each of the at least two cells.
在本申请实施例中,该第一映射关系包括:该至少两个小区按照信道质量升序或降序排列,且排列后的至少两个小区按照预设规则与所述至少两个逻辑信道映射。该预设规则可以是使得与每个逻辑信道对应的小区中包括第一类小区和/或第二类小区的规则,该第一类小区为位于排序后的至少两个小区中的前半部分的小区(采用降序排列时,该前半部分的小区就是信道质量较好的小区),该第二类小区为位于排序后的至少两个小区中的后半部分的小区(采用降序排列时,该后半部分的小区就是信道质量较差的小区)。在本申请实施例中,不对该预设规则进行限制。其中,至少两个小区的数量为奇数时,排列后最中间的小区可以属于前半部分的小区,也可以属于后半部分的小区。In the embodiment of the present application, the first mapping relationship includes: the at least two cells are arranged in ascending or descending order of channel quality, and the arranged at least two cells are mapped to the at least two logical channels according to a preset rule. The preset rule may be a rule that makes the cells corresponding to each logical channel include the first type of cell and/or the second type of cell, and the first type of cell is located in the first half of the at least two sorted cells. Cells (when sorting in descending order, the cells in the first half are the cells with better channel quality), and the second type of cells is the cells in the latter half of the at least two sorted cells (when sorting in descending order, the latter Half of the cells are the cells with poor channel quality). In the embodiment of the present application, the preset rule is not restricted. Wherein, when the number of at least two cells is an odd number, the middle cell after the arrangement may belong to the first half of the cells or the second half of the cells.
作为一种示例,网络侧设备为终端侧设备的2个逻辑信道(LCH1和LCH2)配置了6个小区(CC1~CC6),以终端侧设备测量小区的RSRP作为该小区的信道质量为例。当终端侧设备获取6个小区的RSRP后,则将该6个小区按照RSRP降序排列,得到排序后的小区顺序为CC1、CC3、CC2、CC4、CC6以及CC5,如图12A所示。然后,终端侧设备根据预设的分配规则,将排序后的小区分配给2个逻辑信道。该预设的分配规则可以为按照排序后的小区顺序,依次将排序后的小区分配给逻辑信道,且一次分配过程中只能为一个逻辑信道分配一个小区。则,终端侧设备将CC1分配给LCH1,然后将CC3分配给LCH2,将CC2分配给LCH1,将CC4分配给LCH2,将CC6分配给LCH1以及将CC5分配给LCH2,从而得到第一映射关系为:LCH1与CC1、CC2以及CC6关联,LCH2与CC3、CC4以及CC5关联。As an example, the network side device configures 6 cells (CC1 to CC6) for the 2 logical channels (LCH1 and LCH2) of the terminal side device, and the RSRP of the cell measured by the terminal side device is used as the channel quality of the cell as an example. When the terminal-side device obtains the RSRP of the 6 cells, the 6 cells are arranged in descending order of RSRP, and the sequence of the cells obtained after sorting is CC1, CC3, CC2, CC4, CC6, and CC5, as shown in FIG. 12A. Then, the terminal-side device allocates the sorted cells to the two logical channels according to the preset allocation rule. The preset allocation rule may be to allocate the sorted cells to the logical channels in sequence according to the sorted cell order, and only one cell can be allocated to one logical channel in one allocation process. Then, the terminal-side device allocates CC1 to LCH1, then CC3 to LCH2, CC2 to LCH1, CC4 to LCH2, CC6 to LCH1, and CC5 to LCH2, thereby obtaining the first mapping relationship: LCH1 is associated with CC1, CC2, and CC6, and LCH2 is associated with CC3, CC4, and CC5.
作为一种示例,网络侧设备为终端侧设备的2个逻辑信道(LCH1和LCH2)配置了8个小区(CC1~CC8),以终端侧设备测量小区的RSRP作为该小区的信道质量为例。当终端侧设备获8个小区的RSRP后,则将该8个小区按照RSRP升序排列,得到排序后的小区顺序为CC5、CC6、CC4、CC7、CC8、CC2、CC3以及CC1,如图12B所示。然后,终端侧设备根据预设的分配规则,将排序后的小区分配给2个逻辑信道。该预设的分配规则可以为按照排序后的小区顺序,依次将排序后的小区分配给逻辑信道,且一次分配过程中为一个逻辑信道分配2个小区。则,终端侧设备将CC5和CC6分配给LCH1,然后将CC4、CC7分配给LCH2,将CC8、CC2分配给LCH1,将CC3以及CC1分配给LCH2,从而得到第一映射关系为:LCH1与CC5、CC6、CC8以及CC2关联,LCH2与CC4、CC7、CC3以及CC1关联。As an example, the network side device configures 8 cells (CC1 to CC8) for the 2 logical channels (LCH1 and LCH2) of the terminal side device. Take the RSRP of the cell measured by the terminal side device as the channel quality of the cell as an example. When the terminal-side equipment obtains the RSRP of 8 cells, it will arrange the 8 cells in ascending order of RSRP, and the sorted cell order is CC5, CC6, CC4, CC7, CC8, CC2, CC3, and CC1, as shown in Figure 12B Show. Then, the terminal-side device allocates the sorted cells to the two logical channels according to the preset allocation rule. The preset allocation rule may be that the ranked cells are allocated to logical channels in sequence according to the sequence of the ranked cells, and two cells are allocated to one logical channel in one allocation process. Then, the terminal-side device allocates CC5 and CC6 to LCH1, then allocates CC4 and CC7 to LCH2, CC8 and CC2 to LCH1, and CC3 and CC1 to LCH2, thereby obtaining the first mapping relationship: LCH1 and CC5, CC6, CC8, and CC2 are associated, and LCH2 is associated with CC4, CC7, CC3, and CC1.
当然,根据预设规则不同,还可以得到不同的第一映射关系,在此不作限制。Of course, according to different preset rules, different first mapping relationships can also be obtained, which is not limited here.
S1105、终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送第一指示,网络侧设备接收该第一指示。S1105. The terminal side device sends a first instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the first instruction.
在本申请实施例中,该第一指示用于指示该第一映射关系。当终端侧设备确定该第一 映射关系后,则可以上报给网络侧设备。若网络侧设备为每个逻辑信道配置了关联的小区,则网络侧设备可以根据该第一指示修改逻辑信道的关联小区。该第一指示可以是MAC CE信令,或者是RLC控制协议数据单元(control protocol data unit,control PDU),或者是PDCP control PDU,也可以是RRC信令,在此不作限制。In the embodiment of the present application, the first indication is used to indicate the first mapping relationship. After the terminal side device determines the first mapping relationship, it can report to the network side device. If the network side device configures an associated cell for each logical channel, the network side device may modify the associated cell of the logical channel according to the first indication. The first instruction may be MAC CE signaling, or RLC control protocol data unit (control protocol data unit, control PDU), or PDCP control PDU, or RRC signaling, which is not limited here.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不限制各个步骤的执行顺序,图11中的执行顺序仅为一种示例,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限制。It should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, the execution order of each step is not limited. The execution order in FIG. 11 is only an example, and should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
在上述技术方案中,通过终端侧设备修改逻辑信道与小区的映射关系,可以实现传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。且,相较于由网络侧设备预先配置逻辑信道与小区的映射关系的方式,可以避免某一个逻辑信道关联的小区的信道质量一直偏好,而其他逻辑信道关联的小区的信道质量一直偏差,从而导致的数据传输的可靠性低的问题。In the above technical solution, by modifying the mapping relationship between the logical channel and the cell by the terminal-side device, the balance of transmission quality and resource utilization can be achieved. Moreover, compared to the way that the network side device pre-configures the mapping relationship between logical channels and cells, it can avoid that the channel quality of the cell associated with a certain logical channel is always preferred, while the channel quality of the cell associated with other logical channels is always deviated, thus Causes the problem of low reliability of data transmission.
另外,在前述实施例中,重复传输过程是在终端侧设备和网络侧设备之间进行的。在实际使用中,不同的终端侧设备之间也可以进行重复传输。In addition, in the foregoing embodiment, the repeated transmission process is performed between the terminal side device and the network side device. In actual use, repeated transmissions can also be performed between different terminal side devices.
作为一种示例,不同的终端侧设备之间可以通过侧行链路(sidelink,SL)接口进行重复传输,其中,sidelink接口是两个终端侧设备进行直连通信的接口。请参考图13A,为不同的终端侧设备之间进行duplication的协议栈示意图。在图13A中,包括发送方(transmitter,Tx)UE和接收方(receiver,Rx)UE。Tx UE的一个侧行链路无线承载(sidelink radio bearer,SLRB)向Rx UE发送复制的数据包时,首先在PDCP层对数据包进行复制,然后递交到多个SL RLC实体,并通过对应的SL LCH进行传输,SL LCH和侧行链路载波(SL carrier)之间有映射关系,类似于前述的逻辑信道与小区之间的映射关系,其中,SL LCH与SL carrier之间的映射关系由UE确定。同样地,也可以为一个SLRB配置更多条腿进行重复传输,如图13B所示,为一个SLRB配置了4条腿进行重复传输。As an example, different terminal-side devices may perform repeated transmission through a sidelink (SL) interface, where the sidelink interface is an interface for direct communication between two terminal-side devices. Please refer to FIG. 13A, which is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack for duplication between different terminal side devices. In FIG. 13A, a transmitter (transmitter, Tx) UE and a receiver (receiver, Rx) UE are included. When a sidelink radio bearer (SLRB) of a Tx UE sends a copied data packet to the Rx UE, the data packet is first copied at the PDCP layer, and then delivered to multiple SL RLC entities, and passed the corresponding The SL LCH is transmitted, and there is a mapping relationship between the SL LCH and the side link carrier (SL carrier), which is similar to the foregoing mapping relationship between the logical channel and the cell, where the mapping relationship between the SL LCH and the SL carrier is determined by UE is determined. Similarly, one SLRB can be configured with more legs for repeated transmission. As shown in FIG. 13B, one SLRB is configured with four legs for repeated transmission.
前述图4~图12B所示的实施例同样适用于终端侧设备之间的重复传输。以图4所示的实施例为例进行说明。请参考图14,为本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的另一种示例的流程图,该流程图的描述如下:The foregoing embodiments shown in FIGS. 4 to 12B are also applicable to repeated transmissions between terminal-side devices. Take the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 as an example for description. Please refer to FIG. 14, which is a flowchart of another example of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of this application. The description of the flowchart is as follows:
S1401、网络侧设备向终端侧设备1发送第一配置信令,终端侧设备1接收该第一配置信令。S1401. The network side device sends a first configuration signaling to the terminal side device 1, and the terminal side device 1 receives the first configuration signaling.
该第一配置信令用于指示为终端侧设备1和终端侧设备2之间SLRB的配置重复传输功能。该第一配置信令中包括的内容与步骤S401中类似,在此不再赘述。The first configuration signaling is used to indicate the configuration repeat transmission function of the SLRB between the terminal side device 1 and the terminal side device 2. The content included in the first configuration signaling is similar to that in step S401, and will not be repeated here.
S1402、网络侧设备向终端侧设备1发送第二配置信令,终端侧设备1接收该第二配置信令。S1402. The network side device sends second configuration signaling to the terminal side device 1, and the terminal side device 1 receives the second configuration signaling.
该第二配置信令用于指示为该SLRB的每个SL LCH配置关联的小区集合或者SL载波或者SL带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)或者SL资源池集合。SL资源池是指sidelink载波上一部分时域连续或者不连续,且频域连续或不连续的资源的集合。该第二配置信令指示的内容也可由终端侧设备确定,在图14中,以通过网络侧设备配置为例。The second configuration signaling is used to indicate a cell set or SL carrier or SL bandwidth part (BWP) or SL resource pool set associated with each SL LCH configuration of the SLRB. The SL resource pool refers to a collection of resources that are continuous or discontinuous in the time domain and continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain on the sidelink carrier. The content indicated by the second configuration signaling can also be determined by the terminal-side device. In FIG. 14, the configuration by the network-side device is taken as an example.
S1403、终端侧设备1获取至少两个SL LCH中每个SL LCH的上行数据传输质量。S1403. The terminal-side device 1 obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH in the at least two SL LCHs.
每个SL LCH的上行数据传输质量,通过与该SL LCH关联的SL载波的信道质量来表示。例如,可以是该SL LCH关联的多个SL载波的信道质量的平均值或者最大值等,与步骤S403中相似。SL载波的信道质量可以是RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI,还可以是反映SL信道拥塞程度的参数,例如可以是该SL载波的信道忙碌比例(channel busy ratio,CBR),其中,该参数的值越大,则表示该SL载波的信道质量越差。The uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH is represented by the channel quality of the SL carrier associated with the SL LCH. For example, it may be the average value or the maximum value of the channel quality of the multiple SL carriers associated with the SL LCH, which is similar to that in step S403. The channel quality of the SL carrier can be RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI, or it can be a parameter reflecting the degree of congestion of the SL channel, for example, it can be the channel busy ratio (CBR) of the SL carrier, where the value of this parameter The larger the value, the worse the channel quality of the SL carrier.
具体的获取方式与步骤S403相似,在此不再赘述。The specific acquisition method is similar to step S403, and will not be repeated here.
S1404、网络侧设备发送第一指示,终端侧设备1接收该第一指示。S1404. The network side device sends a first instruction, and the terminal side device 1 receives the first instruction.
该第一指示用于指示至少一个传输质量门限,该至少一个传输质量门限用于终端侧设备确定用于重复传输的SL LCH。该传输质量门限可以理解为前述RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI/CBR等的门限值。The first indication is used to indicate at least one transmission quality threshold, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine an SL LCH for repeated transmission. The transmission quality threshold can be understood as the aforementioned RSRP/RSRQ/SINR/RSSI/CBR and other thresholds.
该至少一个传输质量门限值的设置方式与步骤S404中相似,在此不再赘述。The method for setting the at least one transmission quality threshold is similar to that in step S404, and will not be repeated here.
S1405、终端侧设备1根据每个SL LCH的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的SL LCH。S1405. The terminal-side device 1 determines an SL LCH for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH.
S1406、终端侧设备1向网络侧设备发送第二指示,网络侧设备接收该第二指示。S1406. The terminal side device 1 sends a second instruction to the network side device, and the network side device receives the second instruction.
该第二指示用于指示该SLRB的至少两个SL LCH中每个SL LCH是否用于数据传输。The second indication is used to indicate whether each SL LCH of the at least two SL LCHs of the SLRB is used for data transmission.
S1407、在用于数据传输的SL LCH的数量大于1的情况下,终端侧设备1在该用于数据传输的SL LCH上进行重复传输。S1407: In a case where the number of SL LCHs used for data transmission is greater than 1, the terminal side device 1 performs repeated transmission on the SL LCHs used for data transmission.
步骤S1405~步骤S1407与步骤S405~步骤S407相似,在此不再赘述。Step S1405 to step S1407 are similar to step S405 to step S407 and will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不限制各个步骤的执行顺序,图14中的执行顺序仅为一种示例,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限制。It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, the execution order of each step is not limited. The execution order in FIG. 14 is only an example, and should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
通过上述技术方案,终端侧设备可以根据每个SL LCH的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的SL LCH,这样,当每个SL LCH的上行数据传输质量较好时,则终端侧设备可以只选用其中的一部分SL LCH进行重复传输,从而可以避免资源浪费。且,当每个SL LCH的上行数据传输质量较差时,终端侧设备可以使用所有的SL LCH进行重复传输,以保证传输质量,从而可以实现在SL重复传输场景中传输质量和资源利用率的均衡。Through the above technical solution, the terminal-side device can determine the SL LCH for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH. In this way, when the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH is better, the terminal-side device can only Part of the SL LCH is selected for repeated transmission, thereby avoiding resource waste. Moreover, when the uplink data transmission quality of each SL LCH is poor, the terminal-side device can use all the SL LCHs for repeated transmission to ensure the transmission quality, so that the transmission quality and resource utilization can be improved in the SL repeated transmission scenario. balanced.
上述主要从网络侧设备和终端侧设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,为了实现上述功能,网络侧设备或终端侧设备可以包括执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请的实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between the network side device and the terminal side device. It can be understood that, in order to implement the above-mentioned functions, the network-side device or the terminal-side device may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules that perform each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that in combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
在采用集成的单元(模块)的情况下,图15示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的可能的示例性框图,该装置1500可以以软件的形式存在。装置1500可以包括:处理单元1502和通信单元1503。处理单元1502用于对装置1500的动作进行控制管理。通信单元1503用于支持装置1500与其他网络实体的通信。可选地,通信单元1503也称为收发单元,可以包括接收单元和/或发送单元,分别用于执行接收和发送操作。装置1500还可以包括存储单元1501,用于存储装置1500的程序代码和/或数据。In the case of an integrated unit (module), FIG. 15 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of a device involved in an embodiment of the present application, and the device 1500 may exist in the form of software. The apparatus 1500 may include: a processing unit 1502 and a communication unit 1503. The processing unit 1502 is used to control and manage the actions of the device 1500. The communication unit 1503 is used to support communication between the device 1500 and other network entities. Optionally, the communication unit 1503 is also called a transceiving unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, which are used to perform receiving and sending operations, respectively. The apparatus 1500 may further include a storage unit 1501 for storing program codes and/or data of the apparatus 1500.
其中,处理单元1502可以是处理器或控制器,其可以实现或执行结合本申请的实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。通信单元1503可以是通信接口、收发器或收发电路等,其中,该通信接口是统称,在具体实现中,该通信接口可以包括多个接口。存储单元1501可以是存储器。The processing unit 1502 may be a processor or a controller, which may implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application. The communication unit 1503 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, or a transceiving circuit, etc., where the communication interface is a general term. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may include multiple interfaces. The storage unit 1501 may be a memory.
该装置1500可以为上述任一实施例中的终端侧设备、或者还可以为设置在终端侧设备中的芯片。处理单元1502可以支持装置1500执行上文中各方法示例中终端侧设备的动 作。或者,处理单元1502主要执行方法示例中的终端侧设备内部动作,通信单元1503可以支持装置1500与网络侧设备之间的通信。The apparatus 1500 may be the terminal-side device in any of the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip provided in the terminal-side device. The processing unit 1502 can support the apparatus 1500 to perform the actions of the terminal-side device in the above method examples. Alternatively, the processing unit 1502 mainly executes the internal actions of the terminal side device in the method example, and the communication unit 1503 may support communication between the apparatus 1500 and the network side device.
具体地,在一个实施例中,通信单元1503可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤S401~步骤S403、步骤S405以及步骤S407,或用于执行图7所示的实施例中的步骤S701~步骤S704、步骤S706以及步骤S708,或用于执行图9所示的实施例中的步骤S901~步骤S904、步骤S906以及步骤S908,或用于执行图11所示的实施例中的步骤S1101~步骤S1102以及步骤S1105,或用于执行图14所示的实施例中的步骤S1401~步骤S1402、步骤S1404以及步骤S1406,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。Specifically, in an embodiment, the communication unit 1503 may be used to perform steps S401 to S403, step S405, and step S407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, or to perform steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. Steps S701 to S704, S706, and S708, or used to perform steps S901 to S904, step S906, and step S908 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, or used to perform the steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 Steps S1101 to S1102 and S1105, or used to perform steps S1401 to S1402, step S1404, and step S1406 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 14, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
处理单元1502可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤S404、步骤S406以及步骤S408,或用于执行图7所示的实施例中的步骤S705、步骤S707以及步骤S709,或用于执行图9所示的实施例中的步骤S905、步骤S907以及步骤S909,或用于执行图11所示的实施例中的步骤S1103~步骤S1104,或用于执行图14所示的实施例中的步骤S1403、步骤S1405以及步骤S1407,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The processing unit 1502 may be used to perform step S404, step S406, and step S408 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, or used to perform step S705, step S707, and step S709 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, or for Perform step S905, step S907, and step S909 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, or used to perform step S1103 to step S1104 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, or used to perform step S1103 to step S1104 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Steps S1403, S1405, and S1407, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be cited in the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对单元(模块)的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。在本申请的实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理模块中,也可以是各个模块单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。It should be noted that the division of units (modules) in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The functional modules in the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing module, or each module may exist alone physically, or two or more modules may be integrated into one module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules.
所述集成的模块如果以软件功能模块的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质可以为存储器等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated module is implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solutions can be embodied in the form of software products, and the computer software products are stored in a storage The medium includes several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium may be various mediums capable of storing program codes, such as a memory.
如图16所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1600,其中,通信装置1600可以是终端侧设备,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端侧设备的功能;通信装置1600也可以是能够支持终端侧设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端侧设备的功能的装置。其中,该通信装置1600可以为芯片***。本申请实施例中,芯片***可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。As shown in Figure 16 is a communication apparatus 1600 provided by an embodiment of this application, where the communication apparatus 1600 may be a terminal-side device, which can realize the function of the terminal-side device in the method provided in the embodiment of this application; the communication apparatus 1600 may also be A device that supports the terminal-side device to implement the function of the terminal-side device in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. Wherein, the communication device 1600 may be a chip system. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
在硬件实现上,上述通信单元1503可以为收发器,收发器集成在通信装置1600中构成通信接口1610。In terms of hardware implementation, the aforementioned communication unit 1503 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver is integrated in the communication device 1600 to form a communication interface 1610.
通信装置1600包括至少一个处理器1620,用于实现或用于支持通信装置1600实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端侧设备的功能。示例性地,处理器1620可以根据每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。The communication apparatus 1600 includes at least one processor 1620, which is configured to implement or support the communication apparatus 1600 to implement the function of the terminal-side device in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the processor 1620 may determine the logical channel used for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, which is not repeated here.
通信装置1600还可以包括至少一个存储器1630,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1630和处理器1620耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合 或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1620可能和存储器1630协同操作。处理器1620可能执行存储器1630中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。The communication device 1600 may further include at least one memory 1630 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1630 and the processor 1620 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. The processor 1620 may cooperate with the memory 1630 to operate. The processor 1620 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1630. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
通信装置1600还可以包括通信接口1610,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1600中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备可以是网络侧设备。处理器1620可以利用通信接口1610收发数据。通信接口1610具体可以是收发器。The communication apparatus 1600 may further include a communication interface 1610 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1600 can communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the other device may be a network side device. The processor 1620 can use the communication interface 1610 to send and receive data. The communication interface 1610 may specifically be a transceiver.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1610、处理器1620以及存储器1630之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图16中以存储器1630、处理器1620以及通信接口1610之间通过总线1640连接,总线在图16中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图16中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection medium between the communication interface 1610, the processor 1620, and the memory 1630. In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1630, the processor 1620, and the communication interface 1610 are connected by a bus 1640 in FIG. 16, and the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 16. The connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 16, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器1620可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 1620 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component. Or execute the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器1630可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1630 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), For example, random-access memory (RAM). The memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, for storing program instructions and/or data.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端也可以是电路。该通信装置可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端侧设备所执行的动作。The embodiments of the present application also provide a communication device, which may be a terminal or a circuit. The communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal-side device in the foregoing method embodiments.
当该通信装置为终端侧设备时,图17示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图17中,终端设备以手机作为例子。如图17所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。When the communication device is a terminal-side device, FIG. 17 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate. In FIG. 17, the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example. As shown in Figure 17, the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device. The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal. The antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图17中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做 限制。When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. For ease of description, only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 17. In actual terminal equipment products, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device. The memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图17所示,终端设备包括收发单元1710和处理单元1720。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1710中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1710中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1710包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。In the embodiments of the present application, the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver unit of the terminal device, and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 17, the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1710 and a processing unit 1720. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on. The processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1710 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1710 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1710 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. The transceiver unit may sometimes be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit. The receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit. The transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
应理解,收发单元1710用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理单元1720用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。It should be understood that the transceiving unit 1710 is configured to perform sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment, and the processing unit 1720 is configured to perform other operations on the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment except for the transceiving operation.
例如,在一种实现方式中,收发单元1710用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤S401~步骤S403、步骤S405以及步骤S407中终端侧设备的收发操作,和/或收发单元1710还用于执行本申请实施例中终端侧设备的其他收发步骤。处理单元1720,用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤S404、步骤S406以及步骤S408,和/或处理单元1720还用于执行本申请实施例中终端侧设备的其他处理步骤。For example, in an implementation manner, the transceiving unit 1710 is configured to perform step S401 to step S403, step S405, and step S407 in the transceiving operation of the terminal side device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or the transceiving unit 1710 also It is used to perform other receiving and sending steps of the terminal-side device in the embodiment of the present application. The processing unit 1720 is configured to execute step S404, step S406, and step S408 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and/or the processing unit 1720 is further configured to execute other processing steps of the terminal-side device in the embodiment of the present application.
当该通信装置为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。When the communication device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit. Among them, the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface; the processing unit is a processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时,可以参照图18所示的设备。作为一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图16中处理器1620的功能。在图18中,该设备包括处理器1810,发送数据处理器1820,接收数据处理器1830。上述实施例中的处理单元1502可以是图18中的该处理器1810,并完成相应的功能。上述实施例中的通信单元1503可以是图18中的发送数据处理器1820,和/或接收数据处理器1830。虽然图18中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器,但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明,仅是示意性的。When the communication device in this embodiment is a terminal device, the device shown in FIG. 18 can be referred to. As an example, the device can perform functions similar to the processor 1620 in FIG. 16. In FIG. 18, the device includes a processor 1810, a data sending processor 1820, and a data receiving processor 1830. The processing unit 1502 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1810 in FIG. 18, and completes corresponding functions. The communication unit 1503 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1820 and/or the receiving data processor 1830 in FIG. 18. Although the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 18, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
图19示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置1900中包括调制子***、中央处理子***、周边子***等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子***。具体的,该调制子***可以包括处理器1903,接口1904。其中处理器1903完成上述处理单元1502的功能,接口1904完成上述通信单元1503的功能。作为另一种变形,该调制子***包括存储器1906、处理器1903及存储在存储器1906上并可在处理器上运行的程序,该处理器1903执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是,所述存储器1906可以是非易失性的,也可以是易失性的,其位置可以位于调制子***内部,也可以位于处理装置1900中,只要该存储器1906可以连接到所述处理器1903即可。Fig. 19 shows another form of this embodiment. The processing device 1900 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem. The communication device in this embodiment can be used as a modulation subsystem therein. Specifically, the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1903 and an interface 1904. The processor 1903 completes the functions of the aforementioned processing unit 1502, and the interface 1904 completes the aforementioned functions of the communication unit 1503. As another variant, the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1906, a processor 1903, and a program stored in the memory 1906 and running on the processor. The processor 1903 executes the program to implement the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. Methods. It should be noted that the memory 1906 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1900, as long as the memory 1906 can be connected to the The processor 1903 is fine.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图4或图7或图9或图11或图14中任意一个实施例中终端侧设备执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the terminal in any one of the embodiments of FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 9 or FIG. 11 or FIG. The method executed by the side device.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图4或图7或图9或图11或图14中任意一个实施例中终端侧设备执行的方法。The embodiments of this application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the terminal-side device in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 9 or FIG. 11 or FIG. Method of execution.
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片***,该芯片***包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现前述方法中终端侧设备的功能。该芯片***可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其 他分立器件。The embodiment of the present application provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory for implementing the functions of the terminal-side device in the foregoing method. The chip system can be composed of chips, or include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例提供了一种***,所述***包括前述所述的终端侧设备和网络侧设备。The embodiment of the present application provides a system, which includes the aforementioned terminal side device and network side device.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,简称DSL)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,简称DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。The methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL for short) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). A computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc., integrated with one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, hard disk, Magnetic tape), optical media (for example, digital video disc (DVD for short)), or semiconductor media (for example, SSD).
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the application without departing from the scope of the application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of this application fall within the scope of the claims of this application and their equivalent technologies, this application also intends to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (23)

  1. 一种数据传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A data transmission method, characterized by comprising:
    终端侧设备获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,所述终端侧设备的无线承载配置有在所述至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能;The terminal-side device obtains the uplink data transmission quality of each of the at least two logical channels, and the radio bearer of the terminal-side device is configured with a function of repeated transmission on the at least two logical channels;
    所述终端侧设备根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定所述至少两个逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道;Determining, by the terminal-side device, a logical channel used for data transmission among the at least two logical channels according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel;
    在所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1的情况下,所述终端侧设备在所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行所述重复传输。In a case where the number of logical channels used for data transmission is greater than 1, the terminal side device performs the repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述每个逻辑信道分别与不同的小区组关联,其中,所述至少两个逻辑信道中的任意一个逻辑信道为第一逻辑信道,所述第一逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量为所述第一逻辑信道对应的小区组的信道质量。The method according to claim 1, wherein each logical channel is respectively associated with a different cell group, wherein any one of the at least two logical channels is the first logical channel, and The uplink data transmission quality of the first logical channel is the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端侧设备使用不同类型的参考信号测量与所述至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量;The method according to claim 2, wherein the terminal-side device uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the at least two logical channels;
    其中,所述终端侧设备确定使用第一类型的参考信号进行测量的小区的信道质量为所述终端侧设备在所述小区获取的测量结果与预设偏移量的和值,所述第一类型的参考信号为所述不同类型的参考信号中的其中一种类型的参考信号。Wherein, the terminal-side device determines that the channel quality of the cell measured using the first type of reference signal is the sum of the measurement result obtained by the terminal-side device in the cell and the preset offset, and the first The type of reference signal is one of the different types of reference signals.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端侧设备接收所述网络侧设备发送的第一指示,所述第一指示用于指示至少一个传输质量门限,所述至少一个传输质量门限用于所述终端侧设备确定所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道。The terminal-side device receives a first instruction sent by the network-side device, where the first instruction is used to indicate at least one transmission quality threshold, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the terminal-side device to determine the Logical channel for data transmission.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限包括N个第一传输质量门限和M*N个第二传输质量门限,所述N个第一传输质量门限与所述主逻辑信道关联,所述M*N个第二传输质量门限与所述至少一个辅逻辑信道关联,M、N为大于或等于1的整数;或,The method according to claim 4, wherein the at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold includes N first transmission quality thresholds and M *N second transmission quality thresholds, the N first transmission quality thresholds are associated with the primary logical channel, the M*N second transmission quality thresholds are associated with the at least one secondary logical channel, M, N Is an integer greater than or equal to 1; or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的数量为K个,所述至少一个传输质量门限分为K组,每组传输质量门限中包括至少一个传输质量门限,所述K个逻辑信道与所述K组传输质量门限一一对应,K为大于或等于2的整数;或,The number of the at least two logical channels is K, the at least one transmission quality threshold is divided into K groups, each group of transmission quality thresholds includes at least one transmission quality threshold, and the K logical channels are connected to the K groups for transmission The quality threshold has a one-to-one correspondence, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2; or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限与所述主逻辑信道关联;或,The at least two logical channels include a main logical channel and at least one auxiliary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is associated with the main logical channel; or,
    所述至少一个传输质量门限分别与所述至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道对应。The at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to each of the at least two logical channels respectively.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送第二指示,所述第二指示包括所述无线承载的标识以及比特序列,所述比特序列用于指示所述至少两个逻辑信道中所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道。The terminal-side device sends a second instruction to the network-side device, where the second instruction includes an identifier of the radio bearer and a bit sequence, and the bit sequence is used to indicate the data used in the at least two logical channels Logical channel for transmission.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端侧设备接收网络侧设备发送的第三指示,所述第三指示用于指示所述终端侧设备至少使用所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输;Receiving, by the terminal-side device, a third instruction sent by the network-side device, where the third instruction is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at least a first part of the at least two logical channels for repeated transmission;
    其中,所述终端侧设备根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输 的逻辑信道,包括:Wherein, the terminal-side device determining the logical channel for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel includes:
    所述终端侧设备根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道,所述至少两个逻辑信道包括所述第一部分逻辑信道和所述第二部分逻辑信道;以及,The terminal-side device determines the logical channel used for data transmission in the second partial logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, and the at least two logical channels include the first partial logical channel and the The second part of the logical channel; and,
    所述终端侧设备在所述用于重复传输的逻辑信道上进行重复传输,包括:The terminal-side device performing repeated transmission on the logical channel used for repeated transmission includes:
    所述终端侧设备使用所述第一部分逻辑信道和所述第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道进行所述重复传输。The terminal-side device uses a logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel to perform the repeated transmission.
  8. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端侧设备接收网络侧设备发送的第四指示,所述第四指示用于指示所述终端侧设备至多使用所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输;Receiving, by the terminal-side device, a fourth instruction sent by the network-side device, where the fourth instruction is used to instruct the terminal-side device to use at most a first part of the at least two logical channels for repeated transmission;
    其中,所述终端侧设备根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定用于数据传输的逻辑信道,包括:Wherein, the terminal-side device determining a logical channel for data transmission according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel includes:
    所述终端侧设备根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定所述第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道;Determining, by the terminal-side device, a logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of logical channels according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel;
    以及,as well as,
    所述终端侧设备在所述用于重复传输的逻辑信道上进行重复传输,包括:The terminal-side device performing repeated transmission on the logical channel used for repeated transmission includes:
    在所述第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1时,所述终端侧设备在所述第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道上进行所述重复传输。When the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel is greater than 1, the terminal side device performs the repeated transmission on the logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel.
  9. 一种数据传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A data transmission method, characterized by comprising:
    终端侧设备根据至少两个小区中每个小区的信道质量,确定至少两个逻辑信道与所述至少两个小区的第一映射关系,所述终端设备的无线承载配置有在所述至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能,所述至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道分别通过在所述第一映射关系中所映射的小区进行数据传输;The terminal-side device determines the first mapping relationship between the at least two logical channels and the at least two cells according to the channel quality of each of the at least two cells, and the radio bearer of the terminal device is configured to be in the at least two cells. A function of repeated transmission on a logical channel, each of the at least two logical channels performs data transmission through a cell mapped in the first mapping relationship;
    所述终端侧设备向网络侧设备发送第一指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一映射关系。The terminal-side device sends a first instruction to the network-side device, where the first instruction is used to indicate the first mapping relationship.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一映射关系,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the first mapping relationship comprises:
    所述至少两个小区按照信道质量升序或降序排列;The at least two cells are arranged in ascending or descending order of channel quality;
    排列后的至少两个小区按照预设规则与所述至少两个逻辑信道映射;The at least two cells after the arrangement are mapped with the at least two logical channels according to a preset rule;
    其中,所述预设规则为与所述每个逻辑信道映射的小区中包括第一类小区和/或第二类小区,所述第一类小区为位于所述排列后的至少两个小区中的前半部分的小区,所述第二类小区为位于所述排序后的至少两个小区中的后半部分的小区。Wherein, the preset rule is that the cells mapped to each logical channel include a first type cell and/or a second type cell, and the first type cell is located in at least two cells after the arrangement The cells of the second type are cells located in the second half of the at least two sorted cells.
  11. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信单元,用于获取至少两个逻辑信道中每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,所述通信装置的无线承载配置有在所述至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能;A communication unit, configured to obtain the uplink data transmission quality of each of the at least two logical channels, and the radio bearer of the communication device is configured with a function of repeated transmission on the at least two logical channels;
    处理单元,用于根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量确定所述至少两个逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道,以及,在所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1的情况下,所述处理单元使用所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道上通过所述通信单元进行所述重复传输。A processing unit, configured to determine a logical channel used for data transmission among the at least two logical channels according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, and, when the number of logical channels used for data transmission is greater than one In the case of, the processing unit uses the logical channel for data transmission to perform the repeated transmission through the communication unit.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的装置,其特征在于,所述每个逻辑信道分别与不同的小区组关联,其中,所述至少两个逻辑信道中的任意一个逻辑信道为第一逻辑信道,所述第一 逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量为所述第一逻辑信道对应的小区组的信道质量。The apparatus according to claim 11, wherein each logical channel is respectively associated with a different cell group, wherein any one of the at least two logical channels is the first logical channel, and The uplink data transmission quality of the first logical channel is the channel quality of the cell group corresponding to the first logical channel.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元使用不同类型的参考信号测量与所述至少两个逻辑信道分别对应的小区组的信道质量;The apparatus according to claim 12, wherein the communication unit uses different types of reference signals to measure the channel quality of the cell groups respectively corresponding to the at least two logical channels;
    其中,所述处理单元确定使用第一类型的参考信号进行测量的小区的信道质量为所述通信单元在所述小区获取的测量结果与预设偏移量的和值,所述第一类型的参考信号为所述不同类型的参考信号中的其中一种类型的参考信号。Wherein, the processing unit determines that the channel quality of the cell measured using the first type of reference signal is the sum of the measurement result obtained by the communication unit in the cell and the preset offset, and the first type of The reference signal is one of the different types of reference signals.
  14. 根据权利要求11-13中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 11-13, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    接收所述网络侧设备发送的第一指示,所述第一指示用于指示至少一个传输质量门限,所述至少一个传输质量门限用于所述通信装置确定所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道。Receiving a first instruction sent by the network side device, where the first instruction is used to indicate at least one transmission quality threshold, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is used by the communication apparatus to determine the logical channel used for data transmission.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 14, wherein:
    所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限包括N个第一传输质量门限和M*N个第二传输质量门限,所述N个第一传输质量门限与所述主逻辑信道关联,所述M*N个第二传输质量门限与所述至少一个辅逻辑信道关联,M、N为大于或等于1的整数;或,The at least two logical channels include a primary logical channel and at least one secondary logical channel, the at least one transmission quality threshold includes N first transmission quality thresholds and M*N second transmission quality thresholds, and the N The first transmission quality threshold is associated with the primary logical channel, the M*N second transmission quality thresholds are associated with the at least one secondary logical channel, and M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1; or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的数量为K个,所述至少一个传输质量门限分为K组,每组传输质量门限中包括至少一个传输质量门限,所述K个逻辑信道与所述K组传输质量门限一一对应,K为大于或等于2的整数;或,The number of the at least two logical channels is K, the at least one transmission quality threshold is divided into K groups, each group of transmission quality thresholds includes at least one transmission quality threshold, and the K logical channels are connected to the K groups for transmission The quality threshold has a one-to-one correspondence, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 2; or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道中包括一个主逻辑信道和至少一个辅逻辑信道,所述至少一个传输质量门限与所述主逻辑信道关联;或,The at least two logical channels include a main logical channel and at least one auxiliary logical channel, and the at least one transmission quality threshold is associated with the main logical channel; or,
    所述至少一个传输质量门限分别与所述至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道对应。The at least one transmission quality threshold corresponds to each of the at least two logical channels respectively.
  16. 根据权利要求11-15中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 11-15, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    向网络侧设备发送第二指示,所述第二指示包括所述无线承载的标识以及比特序列,所述比特序列用于指示所述至少两个逻辑信道中所述用于数据传输的逻辑信道。Send a second instruction to the network side device, where the second instruction includes an identifier of the radio bearer and a bit sequence, where the bit sequence is used to indicate the logical channel used for data transmission among the at least two logical channels.
  17. 根据权利要求11-16中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 11-16, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    接收网络侧设备发送的第三指示,所述第三指示用于指示所述通信装置至少使用所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输;Receiving a third instruction sent by a network side device, where the third instruction is used to instruct the communication device to use at least a first part of the at least two logical channels for repeated transmission;
    其中,所述处理单元具体用于:Wherein, the processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道,所述至少两个逻辑信道包括所述第一部分逻辑信道和所述第二部分逻辑信道;以及,According to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel, determine the logical channel used for data transmission in the second partial logical channel, the at least two logical channels including the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel ;as well as,
    所述处理单元使用所述第一部分逻辑信道和所述第二部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道通过所述通信单元进行所述重复传输。The processing unit uses the logical channel used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel and the second partial logical channel to perform the repeated transmission through the communication unit.
  18. 根据权利要求11-16中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 11-16, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    接收网络侧设备发送的第四指示,所述第四指示用于指示所述通信装置至多使用所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一部分逻辑信道进行重复传输;Receiving a fourth instruction sent by a network side device, where the fourth instruction is used to instruct the communication device to use at most a first part of the at least two logical channels for repeated transmission;
    其中,所述处理单元具体用于:Wherein, the processing unit is specifically used for:
    根据所述每个逻辑信道的上行数据传输质量,确定所述第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道;以及,Determining the logical channel used for data transmission in the first part of the logical channel according to the uplink data transmission quality of each logical channel; and,
    在所述第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道的数量大于1时,所述处理单元使用所述第一部分逻辑信道中用于数据传输的逻辑信道通过所述通信单元进行所述重复 传输。When the number of logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel is greater than 1, the processing unit uses the logical channels used for data transmission in the first partial logical channel to perform the repeated transmission through the communication unit .
  19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    处理单元,用于根据至少两个小区中每个小区的信道质量,确定至少两个逻辑信道与所述至少两个小区的第一映射关系,所述通信装置的无线承载配置有在所述至少两个逻辑信道上重复传输的功能,所述至少两个逻辑信道中的每个逻辑信道分别通过在所述第一映射关系中所映射的小区进行数据传输;A processing unit, configured to determine a first mapping relationship between at least two logical channels and the at least two cells according to the channel quality of each of the at least two cells, and the radio bearer of the communication device is configured to A function of repeated transmission on two logical channels, each of the at least two logical channels performs data transmission through a cell mapped in the first mapping relationship;
    通信单元,用于向网络侧设备发送第一指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一映射关系。The communication unit is configured to send a first instruction to the network side device, where the first instruction is used to indicate the first mapping relationship.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一映射关系,包括:The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the first mapping relationship comprises:
    所述至少两个小区按照信道质量升序或降序排列;The at least two cells are arranged in ascending or descending order of channel quality;
    排列后的至少两个小区按照预设规则与所述至少两个逻辑信道映射;The at least two cells after the arrangement are mapped with the at least two logical channels according to a preset rule;
    其中,所述预设规则为与所述每个逻辑信道映射的小区中包括第一类小区和/或第二类小区,所述第一类小区为位于所述排列后的至少两个小区中的前半部分的小区,所述第二类小区为位于所述排列后的至少两个小区中的后半部分的小区。Wherein, the preset rule is that the cells mapped to each logical channel include a first type cell and/or a second type cell, and the first type cell is located in at least two cells after the arrangement The cells of the second type are the cells located in the second half of the at least two cells after the arrangement.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器用于执行存储在所述存储器上的指令,当所述指令被运行时,使得所述装置执行如权利要求1~8或9~10中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, wherein the communication device includes a processor and a memory, the processor is used to execute instructions stored on the memory, and when the instructions are executed, the device executes The method of any one of 1-8 or 9-10.
  22. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括指令,当所述指令被执行时,实现如权利要求1~8或9~10中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising instructions, which when executed, implement the method according to any one of claims 1-8 or 9-10.
  23. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1~8或9~10中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when it runs on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-8 or 9-10.
PCT/CN2020/096163 2019-07-08 2020-06-15 Data transmission method and communication apparatus WO2021004234A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910611902.1A CN112203326B (en) 2019-07-08 2019-07-08 Data transmission method and communication device
CN201910611902.1 2019-07-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021004234A1 true WO2021004234A1 (en) 2021-01-14

Family

ID=74004482

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/096163 WO2021004234A1 (en) 2019-07-08 2020-06-15 Data transmission method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112203326B (en)
WO (1) WO2021004234A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024119515A1 (en) * 2022-12-09 2024-06-13 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and related apparatus

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108737045A (en) * 2017-04-19 2018-11-02 华为技术有限公司 Repeat the method and device of transmission
WO2018228569A1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 华为技术有限公司 Method for processing radio link failure, terminal device, and network device
CN109151883A (en) * 2017-06-16 2019-01-04 华为技术有限公司 Communication means, device and storage medium

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102036390B (en) * 2009-09-30 2014-12-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for processing priority
CN108809476B (en) * 2017-04-27 2021-04-06 电信科学技术研究院 Method and equipment for data transmission

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108737045A (en) * 2017-04-19 2018-11-02 华为技术有限公司 Repeat the method and device of transmission
WO2018228569A1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 华为技术有限公司 Method for processing radio link failure, terminal device, and network device
CN109151883A (en) * 2017-06-16 2019-01-04 华为技术有限公司 Communication means, device and storage medium

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NOKIA; NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "LCP restrictions with multiple CG configurations", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-1907196 LCP RESTRICTIONS FOR MULTIPLE CG, vol. RAN WG2, 2 May 2019 (2019-05-02), Reno USA, pages 1 - 2, XP051711486 *
NOKIA; NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "Summary of [91-LTE-10] Email discussion on candidate techniques for LTE URLLC", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1801864, vol. RAN WG1, 16 March 2017 (2017-03-16), Athens, Greece, pages 1 - 26, XP051397030 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112203326B (en) 2022-05-13
CN112203326A (en) 2021-01-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12003340B2 (en) Method for sending hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgment information, method for receiving hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgment information, and communications apparatus
WO2021027750A1 (en) Method for updating beam information and communication apparatus
TWI717710B (en) HARQ-ACK message transmission method, terminal and base station
US11533153B2 (en) Methods for transmitting information using at least two transport blocks
WO2020143692A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US9425931B2 (en) PUCCH resource management mechanism for coordinated multi-point operation
WO2020098685A1 (en) Method for receiving data and communications apparatus
WO2020199856A1 (en) Information transmission method and communication apparatus
CN108702790B (en) Data transmission method and system under unlicensed spectrum and terminal device
WO2022022286A2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting csi report
US20210083812A1 (en) Communications method and apparatus
US20230026327A1 (en) Sidelink transmission method and apparatus
WO2020201118A1 (en) Configured uplink control information mapping
WO2019129253A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2022110188A1 (en) Sidelink carrier management method, apparatus and system
WO2021004234A1 (en) Data transmission method and communication apparatus
WO2020199815A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2017128512A1 (en) Information sending method, information receiving method, device, and system
WO2013166814A1 (en) Method, ue, base station, and system for triggering channel state information non-periodic feedback
WO2022257711A1 (en) Uplink data sending method, uplink data receiving method and communication apparatus
WO2018228518A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2018202168A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
WO2019023912A1 (en) Response feedback method, terminal, and network device
WO2021056585A1 (en) Hybrid automatic repeat request feedback method and apparatus
WO2021155604A1 (en) Information processing method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20836650

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20836650

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1